JP7317341B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area , and the display means located inside the first display area. A first character is displayed at a first position of the display means, and a second character is displayed at a second position of the display means located inside the second display area,
The second display effect is an operation means image representing the operation means on the boundary between the first display area and the second display area, and prompts the player to operate the operation means. means to display the image,
In the third display effect, the operation means is not operated, the first character is continuously displayed without moving from the first position, and the second character is displayed as an effect in which the position where the boundary and the operation means image overlap and are displayed changes in a state where the image is continuously displayed without moving from the second position ;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable accessory 14 moves; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first display effect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a second display effect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a light guide plate; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 18; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a next timer value display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a next timer value display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a next timer value display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a next timer value display effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer display count suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer display count suggestion effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer display count suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer display count suggestion effect D; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect B; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image transparent display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image transparent display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image transparent display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image transparent display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image combination effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image combination effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image combination effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an image combination effect D; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking production|presentation D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon image matching effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon image matching effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon image matching effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon image matching effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory impact effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory impact effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory impact effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory impact effect D; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a pending display effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending display effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining zone effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining zone effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining zone effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a zone effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a cut-in effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a cut-in effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a cut-in effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a cut-in effect D; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display production|presentation D. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state suggestion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state suggestion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state suggestion production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state suggestion production|presentation D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a related image display effect A; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a related image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a related image display effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a related image display effect D; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect B; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a break effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a breaking effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a breaking effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a breaking effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter button effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter button effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter button effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a meter button effect D; FIG.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in the opening. The light guide plate 17 is a transparent plate member, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17 . The light guide plate 17 is configured to be able to display an image on its main surface by being irradiated with light from the end surface of the light guide plate 17 . The image displayed by the light guide plate 17 will be described later.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning slot 27 (ordinary winning slot 27), and a general winning An opening 29 (ordinary winning opening 29), an out opening 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A has a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B has a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), a production pattern (decorative pattern) 8L, A second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are variably displayed, a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a pending digested image display in which a pending digested image 9C is displayed. and a region. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. The pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols displayed in the second performance symbol display area are similar to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first performance symbol display area, and are smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is displayed.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, in addition to the effect pattern variation effect, a big win effect performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like. . In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("digestion of special figure suspension" described later).

In front of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that four plate-like members (movable light guide plates) can move in an oblique direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) at the four corners of the display device 7, and moves (advances) diagonally from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can rest in position (Fig. 47). The first movable accessory 14 covers almost the entire image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. - 特許庁A third board movable body 18 (third movable accessory 18) (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the center decorative body 10 . A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 that it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize at the first start hole 20 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and win prizes in the second start hole 21, the first big prize hole 30, and the second big prize hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. In the case of a failure, a failure pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be employed as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be employed as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means to determine the normal pattern random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation, and execute the variable display of the normal pattern to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the V area. A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning opening sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning opening 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107 to control them. do. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The frame lamp 66 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the light guide plate 17 with light, and by causing the LED to emit light, an image is displayed on the main surface (image display area) of the light guide plate 17 . In addition, the board lamp 5 includes an LED that irradiates light to the end surface of the movable light guide plate of the first movable accessory 14, and by causing this LED to emit light, the main surface (image display area) of the movable light guide plate Display an image. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 based on the command received from the main control board 80. FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18, and generates the motion pattern data. to control the movement of these movable parts according to. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14, 15, and 18 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

An effect button detection switch 63 a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (Fig. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body touches it, and the like. may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as a general pattern random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth general pattern reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and include a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, and it is determined as "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the power tube 22 is opened three times with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When a jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H big hits correspond to "V passage scheduled big hits (probability variable big hits)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high-probability-low base state with a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to discern the variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting hole 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot". "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed and a high-probability-low base state (latent probability variable state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed.
In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed.
When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V area sensor detection process (step S106), reserved ball The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of whether or not a big hit is made by using a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and a big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. It is determined in advance whether or not it is a big hit by referring to it. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") out of the big hit determination table T1 judge.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Variation pattern selection processing of special figure 2 (step S1403) and variation pattern selection processing of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set to the probability variable counter when shifting to the high probability state (substantially, the high probability state continues until the next big hit). As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter if it is a low probability high base state, and "100" or "10000" is set to the time saving counter if it is a high probability high base state (“100” is set for “16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot” (latent probability variable jackpot), and “10000” is set for “16RV planned passage jackpot” and “16R (real 15R) V passage planned jackpot”) be done). As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time-saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not established (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In addition, when the V opening and closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that wins the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time is that, in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), so generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize winning opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and terminate this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets the time saving counter to "100" or "10000" (step S2308). More specifically, "100" for "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" (latency variable jackpot), "10000" for "16RV planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot" ” is set. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is met, that the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times or 10000 times, or that the next jackpot is won. When the variable display of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state after that becomes a high-probability-low base state, and the high-probability state is latent.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost reached before the 10000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the big hit scheduled to pass V (special stop symbol data 21H) is during the big hit game If V is passed, the game state after the big win is almost guaranteed to be a high-probability-high base state until the next big win.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big win, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is transmitted to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning hole or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area concerned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process is terminated.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic performance pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect contents are switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-fluctuation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect of fading the preview image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation/Display Effects of Movable Board and Display Effects of Light Guide Plate 17 Using FIGS. The operation of 18), the display effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the display effect of the light guide plate 17 will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 to operate during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. Take control. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 irradiates the end surfaces of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 with light during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like, thereby producing a specific image. A display effect to display is performed.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable accessory 14 moves.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG.
The first movable accessory 14 includes four transmissive members (movable light guide plates), each of which is configured to be movable. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) have a substantially rectangular shape. The first movable accessory 14 can rest at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable accessory 14 can move (advance) upward from the state shown in FIG. 1 to an advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. It can stand still (second aspect). In the second mode, the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) cover almost the entire display screen 7 a on the front surface of the image display device 7 . Further, the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) from the state of FIG. , where it can rest.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the first display effect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The main surfaces of the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) serve as an image display area, in which a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is displayed. be able to. When the first board movable body 14 is in the second state, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the second display effect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. Character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be displayed in the image display areas of the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates). The first movable accessory 14 can independently switch the four character images MJ of ``su'', ``ma'', ``i'', and ``ru'' between the visible state and the invisible state.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the display effect of the light guide plate. The light guide plate 17 can display a plurality of (here, seven) smile images SL at different positions on the light guide plate 17 . The light guide plate 17 can independently switch the seven smile images SL between a visible state and a non-visible state.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG.
The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body with a face drawn on it. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. The rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can perform a rotating effect in front of the display screen 7a (second mode).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the third movable accessory 18. As shown in FIG.
The third movable accessory 18 is configured such that a frame-shaped member can move up and down, and can rest at a retracted position (home position) (first aspect). When the third movable accessory 18 is positioned at the home position, it is configured such that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. By moving (advancing) downward from the home position, the third movable accessory 18 can move to the advanced position (deployed position, expanded position) shown in FIG. ). In this second mode, the third movable accessory 18 covers part of the image display device 7 as seen from the player. In addition, the third movable accessory 18 can be moved to the home position by moving (retracting) upward from the state of FIG. 52, and can stand still there.

The third movable accessory 18 is frame-shaped and configured in a rhombic shape. When the third movable accessory 18 is in the unfolded position (in the case of the second mode), the display on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 can be visually recognized from the hollow portion surrounded by the frame-shaped portion.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Next timer value display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. This next timer value display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the next timer value display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Next timer value display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the next timer value display effect A. FIG. In the next timer value display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed with the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. In this state, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 53(B). The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc., other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 53(C) and 53(D), the next timer value enlargement display effect is started. Specifically, when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 5 seconds), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is expanded and displayed as the current timer value. displayed together. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 53(D), the next timer value image NT showing transparent "4" superimposed on the current timer value "5" is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(E), a reduction rendering of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is displayed, while shrinking while being superimposed on the timer image TM1. In other words, the next timer value image NT is reduced so as to fit within the image area where the counter value is displayed in the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the image area where the counter value is displayed in the timer image TM1 in terms of size and display position, as shown in FIG. Clement completes. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position of the portion of "5" of the timer image TM1 are the same, and "4" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the "5" of TM1 matches in size and position, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the second next timer value enlargement display effect is started. As in FIG. 53D, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. Here, the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "4", and the value "3" to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value "4" in an enlarged state. The next timer value image NT representing "3" is enlarged and displayed with transparency, overlapping the current timer value "4", and the upper and lower ends of the number "3" protrude from the display screen 7a. state. After that, the next timer value image NT is reduced in size and display position to the numerical portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1 while being overlapped with the timer image TM1. When the next timer value image NT substantially matches the counter value portion of the timer image TM1 in size and display position, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. 53(H). Here, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and display position of the portion of "4" of the timer image TM1 match, and the next timer value image NT, "3" and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of "4" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes "3". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

As described above, when the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value decrease effect, and the decrement completion effect are repeated, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. 53(I). A timer zero display effect is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(J), an expectation suggesting image EI1 that suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. FIG. In the next timer value display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed with the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 54B, a timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc., other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the next timer value enlargement display effect is started. Specifically, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "30", the value "29" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "30". In FIG. 54C, the next timer value image NT representing "29" is enlarged and displayed obliquely at a position that does not overlap the current timer value "30". Since the next timer value image NT representing "29" is displayed in an enlarged manner, it sometimes protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(D), a reduction rotation effect for the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT moves toward the timer image TM1 while rotating and shrinking, and overlaps the timer image TM1. After that, it continues to shrink while overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size, orientation, and display position approach the number portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the counter value portion of the timer image TM1 in size and display position, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. 54(E). Here, the next timer value image NT representing "29" is reduced so that the size and display position of the portion of "30" of the timer image TM1 are the same, and "29" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after "30" of TM1 matches in size and position, timer image TM1 becomes "29". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

In the next timer value display effect B, the contents of the next timer value display effect change randomly. As an example, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when the timer value is a predetermined value ("5" here), the timer image TM1 is decremented without displaying the next timer value. be. As another example, as shown in FIG. 54(G), an effect similar to the next timer value display effect A is performed. That is, the next timer value image NT representing "3", which overlaps the current timer value "4" and has transparency, is enlarged and displayed, and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" protrude from the display screen 7a. Then, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and display position of the portion of "4" of the timer image TM1 match, and the "3" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image TM1 are reduced. 54(H), the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4" as shown in FIG. 54(H). This completes the decrementation of the timer image TM1.

As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value display effect with random contents, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed, an expectation suggesting image EI1 suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. FIG. In the next timer value display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed with the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the first timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being executed, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54(C). The second timer image TM2 has the same configuration as the first timer image TM1. Note that the second timer image TM2 may have a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. The countdown starts immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may start after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the second timer image TM2 is displayed. Here, after "09" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "09" means 9 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 55(D) to 55(G), in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, similar to the next timer value display effect A, the next timer value enlarged display effect is displayed. , the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect are repeated in order, and the countdown is executed. Specifically, in the next timer value enlarged display effect, when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (first value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the first timer image TM1 is displayed. is displayed in expanded form along with the current timer value. Further, when the timer value of the second timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value (second value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the second timer image TM2 is expanded and displayed as the current timer value. displayed together. The first value and the second value that trigger the start of the next timer value enlarged display effect may be the same value or different values. Further, the next timer value enlarged display effect may be started at the same timing as the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, or may be started at different timings. Moreover, when the timings are different, the first timer image TM1 may be started first, or the second timer image TM2 may be started first.

In FIG. 55(D), the next timer value enlargement display effect is executed in both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2. When the first timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "05" and the next timer value image NT1 representing the value "4" to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value "05" is displayed. displayed together. The next timer value image NT1 has transparency, and the first timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT1. Since the next timer value image NT1 is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the first timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" protrude from the display screen 7a. When the second timer image TM2 (current timer value) is "09" and the next timer value image NT2 representing the value "8" to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value "09" is displayed. displayed together.

In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55(E), a reduction rendering of the next timer value image NT1 is executed. Specifically, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT1 approach the number portion (counter value portion) of the first timer image TM1 while being reduced while being superimposed on the first timer image TM1. When the next timer value image NT1 substantially matches the counter value portion of the first timer image TM1 in size and display position, the decrementation of the first timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. .

The second timer image TM2 in FIG. 55(E) shows a state in which the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT2 is finished and the decrement is completed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(F), the next next timer value enlargement display effect is executed. In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55(G), the next next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(G), the decrementation is completed through the reduction rendering of the next timer value image NT1. The decrement timings of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, as shown in FIG. As shown in H), in the first timer image TM1, a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(I), at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, a first expectation level suggesting image EI1 that suggests the level of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55(I), a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero). , a second expectation level suggesting image EI2 that suggests the level of expectation for the jackpot in the variation is displayed. The second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is an image that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Next timer value display effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. FIG. In the next timer value display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed with the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the first timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being executed, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54(C). The second timer image TM2 has a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. Each configuration will be described later. The countdown starts immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may start after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the second timer image TM2 is displayed. Here, after "08" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "08" means 8 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 56(C) to 55(G), the first timer image TM1 counts down while repeating the next timer value movement display effect and the decrement completion effect in order. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56(C), in the next timer value movement display effect, the next timer value image NT1 "04" is displayed above the first timer image TM1 "05". be done. The next timer value image NT1 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56(D), "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves downward and is partially covered with "05" of the first timer image TM1 and disappears. As shown in FIG. 56(E), when "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves to the position of "05" of the first timer image TM1 and is completely hidden by the first timer image TM1, The value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by one. As shown in FIGS. 56(F) to 56(G), this procedure is repeated to count down the first timer image TM1.

As shown in FIGS. 56(C) to 55(G), the second timer image TM2 is counted down while repeating the timer value movement effect and the decrement completion effect in order. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56C, “07” as the next timer value image NT2 is displayed above “08” as the second timer image TM2, and “07” as the second timer image NT2 is displayed. "09", which is the previous timer value image PT2, is displayed below. The next timer value image NT2 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the second timer image TM2. The previous timer value image PT2 is an image representing the value displayed immediately before the second timer image TM2. A triangular arrow image YG is displayed on the left side of the second timer image TM2. As shown in FIG. 56(D), "07" of the next timer value image NT2, "08" of the second timer value image TM2, and "09" of the previous timer value image PT2 move downward while drawing an arc. Moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the position where the second timer image TM2 was displayed, that is, the position of "07" of the next timer value image NT2 is positioned on the right side of the arrow image YG. The decrementation of image TM2 is completed. As shown in FIGS. 56(F) to 56(G), this procedure is repeated to count down the second timer image TM2. The decrement timings of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, when the countdown is executed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, the timer value in the first timer image TM1 becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. 56(H). ), a timer zero display effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, a first expectation level suggesting image EI1 that suggests the level of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56(I), a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero). , a second expectation level suggesting image EI2 that suggests the level of expectation for the jackpot in the variation is displayed. The second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is an image that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the next timer value display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in a state where the timer image TM is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first timer value represented by the timer image TM1 is displayed next. It is possible to execute a next timer value display effect in which the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed overlapping the timer image TM1 for at least one minute. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has transparency, and the timer image TM1 becomes visible through the next timer image NT. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed rather than the timer image TM1 representing the first timer value. After being displayed as a large image, the timer image TM1 is reduced so as to fit in the image area where the first timer value is displayed, and the second timer value replaces the first timer value to become the timer image TM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is partly displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed as an image that protrudes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the next timer value display effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the next timer value display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TM counts down. However, the timer image TM may count up. Also, the count value is not limited to numbers, and may be specific characters, figures, symbols, or the like. For example, the countdown may be a mode in which images such as a rabbit, a turtle, and a bear are displayed in order. Roman numerals may also be used.

[Modification 2]
The next timer value display effects shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 may be appropriately combined. For example, the timer image TM of FIG. 53 may have the same aspect as the second timer image TM2 of FIG. Also, the next timer value display effects shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 do not have to include part of the effects. For example, in FIG. 53, the expectation level suggesting image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the next timer value display effects shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer value of the timer image TM is finally set to zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM may expire at a value other than zero. For example, the first degree-of-expectation suggestion image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image representing a timer value;
In a state in which the timer image is displayed on the display means, an image representing a second timer value displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed overlapping the timer image for at least one minute.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image having transparency, and the timer image becomes visible through the image representing the second timer value. machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-3,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image larger than the image representing the first timer value, and then is displayed so as to fit within the image area where the first timer value is displayed. and the second timer value becomes the timer image by replacing the first timer value.
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
In the presentation, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image in which a portion of the second timer value protrudes from the display means.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
The game machine, wherein the effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

57 to 60, the timer display number suggesting rendering will be described below. This timer display frequency suggesting effect can be executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the timer display number suggesting effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are retrieved from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This timer display frequency suggesting effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). In addition, you may make it perform the timer display frequency suggestion production|indication during the multiple times fluctuation|variation (plurality of fluctuation|variation production) of a special design.

[Timer Display Count Suggestion A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggesting effect A. FIG.
In the timer display number suggesting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. A timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper region of the timer display region XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57B, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display will appear two more times after the first timer number suggesting display effect.
Note that the timer count suggestion display XA2 has a function of not only suggesting the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, but also suggesting that the timer display itself will be performed.
Also, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 57C shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. there is Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(E), a second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggesting display effect, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57(E), the timer number suggesting display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", suggesting that the timer display will appear one more time after the second timer number suggesting display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 57F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(G), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up performance is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays ``extremely hot'' indicating that the expectation of the big win is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer Display Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestion effect B. FIG.
In the timer display number suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. A timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper region of the timer display region XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58B, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display will appear two more times after the first timer number suggesting display effect.
Also, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count suggestive display XA2 is shown as "one timer left", and the timer count is suggested compared to the time of the first timer count suggestive display effect. It is decremented by one, suggesting that the timer display will appear one more time. FIG. 58(C) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the timer display area XA1. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. there is Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), a second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestive display effect, the timer count suggestive display XA2 is displayed in the upper region of the timer display region XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. After this second timer count suggestive display effect, it suggests that the timer display will appear one more time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 58F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(G), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up performance is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays ``extremely hot'' indicating that the expectation of the big win is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer Display Count Suggestion C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggestion effect C. FIG.
In the timer display frequency suggesting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. A timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper region of the timer display region XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59B, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display will appear two more times after the first timer number suggesting display effect.
Also, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, a timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting suggestion display XA5 shows "waiting for XX seconds", suggesting that the timer display is waiting and will start from now. In this case, the number of "X"s in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer from 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is set to 1, and "Waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X"s in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 may be set to three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. In addition, it is not limited to "X", and other alphabets and symbols such as "○", "□", "△", "?", and "!" may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count suggestive display XA2 is shown as "one timer left", and the timer count is suggested compared to the time of the first timer count suggestive display effect. It is decremented by one, suggesting that the timer display will appear one more time. FIG. 59(D) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the timer display area XA1. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. there is Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(F), a second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggesting display effect, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. After this second timer count suggestive display effect, it suggests that the timer display will appear one more time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 59F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(H), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up performance is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays ``extremely hot'' indicating that the expectation of the big win is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

[Timer Display Count Suggestion D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the effect D suggesting the number of timer displays.
In the timer display frequency suggesting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. A timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper region of the timer display region XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60B, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display will appear two more times after the first timer number suggesting display effect.
Also, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, a timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting suggestion display XA5 shows "waiting for XX seconds", suggesting that the timer display is waiting and will start from now. In this case, the number of "X"s in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer from 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is set to 1, and "Waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X"s in the timer waiting suggestion display XA5 may be set to three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. In addition, it is not limited to "X", and other alphabets and symbols such as "○", "□", "△", "?", and "!" may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count suggestive display XA2 is shown as "one timer left", and the timer count is suggested compared to the time of the first timer count suggestive display effect. It is decremented by one, suggesting that the timer display will appear one more time. FIG. 60(D) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Further, during the first timer display effect, a role product effect is performed in which the second movable accessory 15 moves to the unfolded position. In this role production, the second movable role 15 covers at least a part of the timer display area XA1 (timer number suggesting display XA2 and timer display XA3) and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R from the player's point of view. cover.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the timer display area XA1. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays "CHANCE" indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. there is Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggesting display effect, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer number suggesting display XA2 is a display for suggesting (announcing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. After this second timer count suggestion display effect, it suggests that the timer display will appear one more time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 60(F) shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. Note that the timer display XA3 may count up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up performance is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays ``extremely hot'' indicating that the expectation of the big win is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the degree of expectation for a big win appears anew. , A new character is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, etc. may be executed.

It should be noted that the timer display count suggestive effects A to D may incorporate other effects (other timer display count suggestive effects, etc.) into one effect.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect of suggesting the number of timer display times will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the timer display number suggesting effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being varied, and the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed. After that, the timer display XA3 is performed. According to this configuration, the timer count suggesting display XA2 is performed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, so that the player can look forward to watching the effect in which scene the timer display will appear. Since the timer display XA3 is performed after the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed, when the timer display XA3 is displayed, it is possible to provide expectations for future development while paying attention to the remaining number of timer displays. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned timer display frequency suggestion effects A to D, the timer display XA3 is displayed in the variable display area where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer display XA3 rather than the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to make the player have expectations for the future development. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above timer display number suggesting effects A to D, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed in the variable display area where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are variablely displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the timer number suggesting display XA2 rather than the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to make the player feel expectation for the future development. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the timer display number suggesting effects A to D, the number of times the timer display suggested by the timer number suggesting display XA2 is performed is two or more in the first timer number suggesting display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer number suggesting display XA2 appears, the timer is displayed a plurality of times, so that the player can pay more attention to the timer number suggesting display XA2. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the timer display frequency suggestive effects A to D, after the first timer frequency suggestive display effect, the first timer display effect is performed, and then the second timer frequency suggestive display effect is performed, and the second timer frequency suggestive display effect is performed. In the effect, the timer count suggesting display XA2 suggests that the timer display is performed one less than the timer count suggesting display XA2 in the first timer count suggesting display effect. That is, in the second timer count suggestive display effect, the "number of times the timer display will be performed in the future" represented by the timer count suggestive display XA2 is "1", and in the first timer count suggestive display effect, the timer count suggestive display XA2 represents. The "number of times the timer display will be performed from now on" is "2". According to this configuration, every time the timer display is performed, 1 is subtracted from the "number of future timer displays" indicated by the timer number suggesting display XA2. can accurately indicate the number of times As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the timer display frequency suggestion effects B to D, in the first timer display effect, the timer frequency suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed while the timer display XA3 is being displayed. According to this configuration, the timer number suggesting display XA2 is displayed together with the timer display XA3, so that while enjoying the timer effect of the timer display XA3, the timer number suggesting display XA2 gives a great sense of anticipation for the appearance of the next timer effect. can be granted. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the timer display number suggesting effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the timer display number suggesting effect of the gaming machine of the above embodiment,
[Modification 1]
In the timer display number suggesting display effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number suggested by the timer number suggesting display XA2 in the first timer number suggesting display effect is "2". The number of times suggested by the timer number of times suggestion display XA2 may be three or more or one. In the timer display count presentation, the timer display is executed for the number of times suggested by the timer count suggestion display XA2. For example, when the number of times suggested by the timer number-of-times suggestion display XA2 is "3", then the timer display is executed three times.

[Modification 2]
In the display effect D suggesting the number of timer display times, the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to cover the timer display area XA1 in the timer display effect. You may move so that area|region XA1 may be covered.

[Modification 3]
In the timer display count suggestive display effects A to D, the timer count suggestive display XA2 and timer display XA3 are displayed in the timer display area XA1, and the timer count suggestive display XA2 and timer display XA3 are displayed adjacent to each other. The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 may be separated from each other.

[Modification 4]
In the display effects A to D suggesting the number of timer display times, when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), a chance-up effect is performed. may be performed. Predetermined effects include pseudo-continuous effects, look-ahead effects, zone effects, reach effects, super reach effects, mini game effects, and mission effects.

[Modification 5]
In the timer display number suggesting display effects A to D, the timer number suggesting display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the timer number suggesting display is not limited to this. XA2 and/or timer display XA3 may be displayed in an area different from the variable areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying the decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a timer,
the third display effect is a effect of performing a timer count indication display suggesting that the timer display is performed a predetermined number of times;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed, and after the third display effect is performed. , the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is displayed in a decorative design display area in which the decorative design is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1 or aspect XA-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is displayed in a decorative design display area in which the decorative design is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-3,
The predetermined number of times the timer display is performed in the third display effect is 2 or more.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed again, and the third display effect is performed. The timer number suggesting display suggests that the timer display is performed a number of times that is one less than the predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-5,
In the combination effect, the timer count suggestion display in the third display effect is continuously displayed during the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The timer count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG. This timer count effect is an effect that can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). It is executed at the start of the variable display of the pattern, at the start of the variable production of the decorative pattern, during the variable production of the decorative pattern, during the ready-to-win production (super ready-to-win production), and so on. More specifically, this timer count effect includes a display of counting the timer value using a timer image, and each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the movable body is controlled to move in a predetermined manner, or a specific image is displayed in a predetermined manner. is an effect suggesting that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined period of time.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. FIG.
In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable effect of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and so on. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In the ready-to-win effect of FIG. 61(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating (scrolling downward). In this example, this ready-to-win pattern arrangement is indicated by "7↓7", and the letters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In addition, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. A state in which the first movable accessory 14 is positioned at the home position (origin) is shown (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the left center timer image display area TMH of the display screen 7a during the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 61(A). The timer image display area TMH is a portion of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a (the display screen of the battle effect) that is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area, behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 61B, the characters and numbers "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 61(A) are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side battle. An image is displayed and a battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. Like the reach production, each is waiting at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the count-suggestion upper-right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion upper-right accessory effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. It shows the state of 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position moves, and moves to the first advance position on the display screen 7a. Advance to That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a is movable when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61(B) is counted down for 2 seconds. In addition, the upper right first movable accessory 14a immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the first advance position. Further, in the count-suggestion upper-right accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the display screen 7a executes a count-suggestion lower-right accessory effect. In this count-suggestion-right-right accessory effect, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 48 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestion-right-right accessory effect shown in FIG. It shows the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position moves, and moves to the second advance on the display screen 7a. Advance to position. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b is movable when the timer value of the count suggestion upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61(C) is counted down for 2 seconds. Here, the variation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b is larger than the variation range of the upper right first movable accessory 14a shown in FIG. 61(C). That is, the distance from the home position to the second advanced position is greater than the distance from the home position to the first advanced position. Note that the lower right first movable accessory 14b immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the second advance position. In addition, in the count-suggestion lower-right accessory presentation, the battle presentation is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the count suggestion lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestive lower left accessory effect, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 46 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count suggested lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. It shows the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position moves, and moves to the third advanced position on the display screen 7a. Advance to In other words, the lower left first movable accessory 14c is movable when the timer value of the count suggestion lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61(D) is counted down for 2 seconds. Here, the variation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c is larger than the variation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b shown in FIG. 61(D). That is, the distance from the home position to the third advanced position is greater than the distances from the home position to the first and second advanced positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible when positioned at the third advanced position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 moves so that the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM can be visually recognized. In addition, the lower left first movable accessory 14c immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the third advance position. In addition, in the count-suggestion lower-left accessory presentation, the battle presentation is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the count suggestion upper left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion upper-left character production, 2 seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 44 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestion lower-left character production shown in FIG. It shows the state that has become Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position moves, and moves to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Advance to In other words, the upper left first movable accessory 14d becomes movable when 2 seconds are counted down from the timer value of the count suggestion lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 61(E). Here, the variation range of the upper left first movable accessory 14d is larger than the variation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 61(E). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advanced position is greater than the distances from the home position to the first, second, and third advanced positions. The upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly covers the timer image display area TMH and part of the timer image TM in the state of being positioned at the fourth advanced position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 moves so that the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM can be visually recognized. Note that the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the fourth advance position. In addition, in the count-suggestion lower-left accessory presentation, the battle presentation is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the count-suggestion-all-accessories effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion-all-accessory production, in the count-suggestion-upper-left-accessory production shown in FIG. It shows the state that has become Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the first movable accessory 14 positioned at the home position is fully movable and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the count suggestive upper left accessory effects shown in FIG. Activates when 2 seconds are counted down from the timer value. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61(B), when 10 seconds elapse (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM, all the first movable accessories 14 are moved. . In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 retreat to the home position immediately after advancing to the fourth advance position. In addition, in this count-suggestion-all-accessories production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Thus, in the timer count effect A shown in FIG. 61, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example), the first movable accessory 14 as the movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time two seconds are counted from the timer value that is the starting point, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first movable accessory 14a are displayed. The movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move sequentially (clockwise), suggesting that the timer value has counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable accessories 14 can advance to four stages from the first advanced position to the fourth advanced position. The first movable accessory 14b is in the second advanced position, the lower left first movable accessory 14c is in the third advanced position, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d is in the fourth advanced position. It is designed to fluctuate as As a result, the fact that a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point, both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range It is possible to suggest by Further, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point, the first movable accessory 14 is fully movable and advances to the fourth position on the display screen 7a. It is designed to advance to the position. As a result, both the number of movable accessories and the fluctuation range indicate that a predetermined time (10 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. is possible.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. FIG.
In the timer count effect B, although illustration is omitted, a ready-to-win effect is first executed as shown in FIG. 61(A). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable effect of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and so on. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In the ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, and the decorative pattern 8C is in a fluctuating (scrolling) state. In addition, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. The first movable accessories 14 are positioned at their home positions (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the left center timer image display area TMH of the display screen 7a during the ready-to-win effect. The timer image display area TMH is a portion of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a (the display screen of the battle effect) that is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area, behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 62(A), the characters and numbers "50 seconds remaining" indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the ready-to-win effect are erased, and on the display screen 7a, an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are each set to the home position as in the reach effect. Waiting at (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the display screen 7a executes the count suggestion, upper right, lower left accessory effect. In this count-suggestion upper-right-left accessory effect, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM in the timer display effect shown in FIG. is 48 seconds. When the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14a, which are arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a, are among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position. 1 movable accessory 14c is moved, and advances to the first advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move as a pair when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62(A) is counted down for 2 seconds. In addition, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c immediately retreat to the home position after advancing to the first advance position. In addition, in the count suggestive upper right and lower left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), on the display screen 7a, a count suggesting, lower right upper left accessory effect is executed. In this count suggesting lower right left accessory effect, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 48 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count suggesting upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. is 46 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14b arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a are among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position. The first movable accessory 14d moves and advances to the second advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are movable as a pair when 2 seconds are counted down from the timer value of the count suggestion upper left lower accessory effect shown in FIG. 62(B). do. Here, the variation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d is obtained from the variation range of the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 62(B). is also getting bigger. That is, the distance from the home position to the second advanced position is greater than the distance from the home position to the first advanced position. The lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately retreat to the home position after advancing to the second advance position. In addition, in the count suggestion lower right upper accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the count-suggestion-all-accessories effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion-all-characters production, in the count-suggestion-upper-right-hands-product production shown in FIG. It shows the state of 44 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, the first movable accessory 14 positioned at the home position is fully movable and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are the count suggestive upper right role shown in FIG. Activates when 2 seconds are counted down from the production timer value. Here, all the fluctuation widths of the first movable accessory 14 are larger than the fluctuation widths of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d shown in FIG. 62(C). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advanced position is greater than the distances from the home position to the first and second advanced positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d cover the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible when positioned at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 moves so that the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM can be visually recognized. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 retreat to the home position immediately after advancing to the fourth advance position. Further, in this count suggestion all-accessories production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the display screen 7a executes a jump count suggestion all-accessory effect. In this jump count suggestive all-accessory effect, the timer value displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestive all-accessory effect shown in FIG. 62(D) has changed from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. . That is, even though 10 seconds have not actually passed since the count suggested all-characters production shown in FIG. It shows flying. Thus, when the timer value reaches 34 seconds, the first movable accessory 14 positioned at the home position is all movable and fluctuates in a predetermined manner on the display screen 7a. This predetermined mode of variation is performed as follows. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately after advancing from the home position to the first advance position. The operation of retreating from the first advance position to the home position is repeated at high speed for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move toward the home as indicated by arrows A, B, C, and D. It moves back and forth between the position and the first advance position and fluctuates in small steps for a predetermined time. Here, in FIG. 62(E), the first advanced position is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. It should be noted that all the first movable accessories 14 are positioned at the home position when the movement of this predetermined mode is completed. In addition, in this jump count suggestion all-accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the display screen 7a executes a long count suggesting top right left bottom performance. In this long count suggestive performance of upper right and lower left characters, 14 seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 34 seconds have been displayed in the timer image TM in the jump count suggestion all role performance shown in FIG. At 20 seconds, of the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the left lower first movable accessory 14c, which are diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a, move. , and advanced to the first advanced position on the display screen 7a. In other words, when the timer value shown in FIG. 62(F) reaches 20 seconds, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the left lower first movable accessory 14c move as a pair and advance to the first advance position. to maintain its advanced state. In addition, in this long count suggestion upper right and lower left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the display screen 7a executes a long count suggesting, lower right upper left accessory effect. In this long count suggesting lower right left accessory effect, in the long count suggesting upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. , the timer value is maintained at 20 seconds. Then, when 2 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion shown in FIG. The lower left first movable accessory 14c retreats to the home position. At the same time, among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position, the first lower right movable accessory 14b and the first upper left movable accessory 14d, which are diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a, move. , to the second advance position on the display screen 7a. In other words, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move as a pair when 2 seconds have passed since 20 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM, and move to the second advance position. Advance and maintain the advanced state. In addition, in this long count suggestive lower right left accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a long count suggestion all-accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this long count suggesting all role production, 4 seconds have passed since 20 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the long count suggesting all role production shown in FIG. The timer value is kept at 20 seconds even though two seconds have passed since the shown long count suggestive lower left accessory effect was performed. Thus, when 4 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion shown in FIG. It advances from the advance position to the fourth advance position. At the same time, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the left lower first movable accessory 14c positioned at the home position advance to the fourth advance position. In other words, when 4 seconds have passed since the long count suggestion shown in FIG. , further advances from the second advanced position to the fourth advanced position and maintains the advanced state, while the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move again as a pair and move to the home. Advance from the position to the fourth advanced position and maintain the advanced state. As a result, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, that is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, the upper left first movable role The object 14d advances to the fourth advanced position and maintains the advanced state. In addition, in this long count suggestive all-accessory effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. After that, although illustration is omitted, 2 seconds have passed since the long count suggestive all character production shown in FIG. At this time, all the first movable accessories 14 retreat from the maintained fourth advance position to the home position, and 14 seconds is displayed as the timer value in the timer image TM.

Thus, in the timer count effect B shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time (every time the timer value is counted for two seconds in this example), the first Two predetermined movable bodies of the movable accessory 14 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time two seconds are counted from the timer value that is the starting point, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c, or the lower right movable accessory The first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs, suggesting that the timer value has counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, the paired upper right first movable accessory 14a, left lower first movable accessory 14c, lower right first movable accessory 14b, and upper left first movable accessory 14d have different fluctuation widths on the display screen 7a. It is designed to fluctuate as As a result, the fact that a predetermined time (2 or 4 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value can be suggested by both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range. is possible. Also, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the timer value is counted in a shorter time than the actual elapsed time, or when the timer value is counted in a longer time than the actual elapsed time. is performed, the movable body moves in a special variation mode (Fig. 62(E), Figs. 62(F) to (H)). As a result, it is possible to suggest that the timer value has been counted at a time different from the actual elapsed time by moving the movable body in a special variation mode.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. FIG.
In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In the ready-to-win effect of FIG. 63(A), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-reach design arrangement, and the decorative design 8C is fluctuating (scrolling downward). In this example, the ready-to-win pattern arrangement is indicated by "7↓7", and the letters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. In addition, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. A state in which the first movable accessory 14 is positioned at the home position (origin) is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the left center timer image display area TMH of the display screen 7a during the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 63(A). The timer image display area TMH is a portion of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a (the display screen of the battle effect) that is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area, behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 63B, the characters and numbers "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Also, in this timer display effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 63(A) are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed and a battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. Like the reach production, each is waiting at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the display screen 7a executes a count-suggestion upper-right accessory effect. In this count-suggestion upper-right accessory effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. It shows the state of 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a among the first movable accessories 14 positioned at the home position moves, and moves to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Advance to That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a is movable when the timer value of the timer display performance shown in FIG. In addition, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a in the count suggestion upper right accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the display screen 7a executes a count-suggestion lower-right accessory effect. In this count-suggestion-right-right accessory effect, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 48 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestion-right-right accessory effect shown in FIG. It shows the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b among the first movable accessories 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. In other words, the lower right first movable accessory 14b is movable when the timer value of the count suggestion upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. maintain. As a result, on the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b among the first movable accessories 14 advance to the fourth advanced position and maintain the advanced state. state. In addition, in this count-suggestion lower-right accessory presentation, the battle presentation is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the count suggestion lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion lower-left character production, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 46 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestion lower-right character production shown in FIG. It shows the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c among the first movable accessories 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. In other words, the lower left first movable accessory 14c is movable when 2 seconds are counted down from the timer value of the count suggesting lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. maintain. As a result, of the first movable accessories 14, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first movable accessory 14c advance to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Then, the advanced state is maintained. In addition, the lower left first movable accessory 14c covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible when positioned at the fourth advanced position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 moves so that the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM can be visually recognized. In addition, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a in the count suggestion lower left accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), the count suggestion upper left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count-suggestion upper-left character production, two seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 44 seconds were displayed in the timer image TM in the count-suggestion lower-left character production shown in FIG. It shows the state that has become Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d among the first movable accessories 14 moves and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. In other words, the upper left first movable accessory 14d becomes movable when the timer value of the count suggestion lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. do. As a result, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, that is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, the upper left first movable role The object 14d advances to the fourth advanced position and maintains the advanced state. In addition, the upper left first movable accessory 14d covers the timer image display area TMH and part of the timer image TM in a visible manner in the state of being positioned at the fourth advanced position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 moves so that the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM can be visually recognized. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the count suggestion first and second character effects are executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggestion first and second character effects, in the count suggestion upper left character effect shown in FIG. is 40 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the second movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1) positioned at the home position advances to the center advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the second movable accessory 15 becomes movable when the timer value of the count suggestion upper left accessory effect shown in FIG. 63(F) is counted down by 2 seconds. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63(B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (counted down) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed in the timer image TM, all the first movable parts 14 are moved to the fourth position. In the state advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 moves and advances to the central advanced position approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the center advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 consists of the right upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the left lower left first movable accessory 14b. Positioned between the role object 14c and the upper left first movable role object 14d, that is, stopped at a position not overlapping with all the first movable role objects 14, the timer image display area TMH and part of the battle effect can be visually recognized. It is impossibly covered (the timer image TM is not covered). In addition, in the count suggestion first and second character effects, the battle effects are continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Thus, the second movable accessory 15 immediately retreats to the home position after advancing to the central advancing position. At the same time, all the first movable accessories 14 advanced to the fourth advanced position retreat to the home position. In addition, in the count-suggestion lower-left accessory presentation, the battle presentation is continued on the display screen 7a.

Thus, in the timer count effect C shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time (in this example, each time the timer value is counted for two seconds), the first movable role having a different type as the movable body is displayed. The object 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time two seconds are counted from the timer value that is the starting point, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first movable accessory 14a are displayed. The movable accessory 14c, the upper left first movable accessory 14d, and the second movable accessory 15 are sequentially moved, and the timer value indicates that a predetermined time (2 seconds) has been counted. Moreover, each of the first movable accessories 14 advances sequentially to a predetermined advanced position (fourth advanced position), and then maintains the advanced state until the second movable accessories 15 move. As a result, the fact that a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point can be determined by both the movable accessory and its advancing state. It is possible to suggest by Furthermore, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, all the first movable accessories 14 advance to a predetermined advance position (fourth advance position). In this state, the second movable accessory 15 moves and advances to a predetermined advance position (central advance position). As a result, the timer value when the timer is displayed, or the fact that a predetermined time (10 seconds) has been counted from the timer value that is the starting point, can also be determined by the type of the movable accessory that is movable and its advance state. It is possible to suggest by both

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. FIG.
In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 64(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward). In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. Each of the first movable accessories 14 is located at the home position (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a timer/character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer character display effect, a character image CA1 as a specific image is displayed in the character image display area CAH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 64(A). The character image display area CAH is a part of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a (the display screen for the battle effect) that is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area, behind the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. formed on the side (rear side). A timer image TM is displayed on the lower right side in front of the character image display area CAH. This timer image TM straddles the character image display area CAH and the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to partially cover the character image display area CAH (character image CA1). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 64B, the characters and numbers "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer character display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. A battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between is displayed. In this timer character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. As with the reach production shown, each waits at its home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a character fade-out effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character fade-out effect is the timer character display effect shown in FIG. , character image CA1 is indicated by a wavy line). In this character fade-out effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 64(B). As with the timer/character display effect, each character waits at its home position (origin). In this character fade-out effect, the battle effect is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the count suggesting character erasure performance is executed on the display screen 7a. This count-suggestion character erasing accessory effect is the timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64(B). It shows a state in which the timer value has reached 49 seconds. Thus, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the character image CA1 faded out within the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 becomes invisible. In other words, the character image CA1 becomes unrecognizable every second, and the timer image TM is switched at the timing when it becomes unrecognizable. In addition, since the character image CA1 fades out from the visually recognizable display mode to the difficultly recognizable display mode in one second, the visible state of the character image CA1 during this period indicates the number of seconds of the timer value of one second or less. ing. Furthermore, in this count-indicating character erasing accessory effect, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the first movable accessory 14 positioned at the home position is all moved, and moves to the second position on the display screen 7a. Advance to position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the timers of the timer/character display effects shown in FIG. 64(B). Activates when one second is counted down from the value. All the first movable accessories 14 retreat to the home position immediately after advancing to the second advance position. In addition, in this count-suggestion character erasing accessory production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a timer/plural-characters display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The timer/plural-characters display effect is an effect that is performed immediately after the character image CA1 is deleted in the count suggestive character elimination accessory shown in FIG. 64(D). In this timer/multi-character display effect, character images CA1 and CA2 as specific images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. That is, a plurality of character images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. In this timer/multi-character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are each positioned at the home position (origin). ), and the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a count-suggesting character reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count-suggesting character reduction effect is the count-suggesting character elimination accessory effect shown in FIG. It shows the state that has become Although not shown, only the character image CA2 out of the character images CA1 and CA2 fades out with the lapse of one second after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the character image CA2 faded out within the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA2 becomes invisible. In this count-suggesting character reduction effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are each at the home position (origin). , and the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the count suggesting character erasure performance is executed on the display screen 7a. This count-suggesting character elimination performance is the count-suggesting character reduction performance shown in FIG. It shows the state that has become Although not shown, the character image CA1 fades out as time elapses for one second after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Thus, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the character image CA1 faded out within the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 becomes invisible. In other words, when 2 seconds have elapsed since 49 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, both the character images CA1 and CA2 are completely erased, and the timer value counts to 2 at the timing when both the character images CA1 and CA2 become invisible. Seconds are subtracted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by the number of seconds corresponding to the number of erased character images (for example, if three character images are erased, the count of the timer value is decremented by 3 seconds). Furthermore, in this count-indicating character erasing accessory effect, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the first movable accessory 14 positioned at the home position is all moved, and moves forward on the display screen 7a for the fourth time. Advance to position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are timers for the count suggestion character reduction effect shown in FIG. 64(F). Activates when one second is counted down from the value. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 retreat to the home position immediately after advancing to the fourth advance position. In addition, in this count-suggestion-character-erasing-accessory-effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after all the first movable accessories 14 shown in FIG. 64(A) is displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. In other words, this ready-to-win effect is the display of a plurality of character images in the timer/multiple-characters display effect shown in FIG. This is done when all the first movable accessories 14 have advanced to the fourth advanced position, that is, the display of a plurality of character images and the advancement of the first movable accessory 14 to the fourth advanced position are not possible. , It is a chance-up production.

As described above, in the timer count effect D shown in FIG. 64, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time (in this example, each time the timer value is counted for one second), the character image as the specific image is displayed in a predetermined manner. is changed to In other words, for example, the character image changes from the display mode in which the character image is recognizable to the display mode in which the character image is difficult to see, within one second from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value which is the starting point. . Moreover, when the character image changes to a display mode that is difficult to see, all the first movable accessories 14 advance to a predetermined advance position. As a result, the fact that the predetermined time (one second) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value serving as the starting point indicates a change in the display mode of the character image as the specific image and a predetermined accessory. It is possible to suggest by both that the movement of In addition, an effect such as displaying a plurality of character images and changing the advance position of the first movable accessory 14 is performed. As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for variation of the decorative pattern according to the number of displayed character images and the advancing position of the movable accessory.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the movable body is controlled to move in a predetermined manner. In addition, the movable body is formed of a highly transparent member, and is configured to move so that the timer value can be visually recognized no matter how the movement is controlled. According to this configuration, the player can count the predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value just by looking at the movable body without paying attention to the timer value. It becomes clear. As a result, the player can, for example, obtain a timer value at which an advantageous privilege is likely to be granted in an effect in which an advantageous privilege is likely to be granted (increases the expectation of a big win) when the count reaches a specific timer value. becomes easily discernible. Further, by moving the movable body in various modes, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting not only the timer value but also the provision of an advantageous privilege (expectation of a big win). For example, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, one of the plurality of movable bodies is moved in a predetermined manner, or at least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies are moved in a predetermined manner. It is also possible to As a result, the player can watch with expectation which of the plurality of movable bodies has moved or how many of the plurality of movable bodies have moved. Become. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the plurality of movable bodies are sequentially (clockwise) moved, and each of the movable bodies is moved. It is configured so that the width of fluctuation from the home position is different. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that a predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point by both the movable body and its fluctuation range. It's becoming Furthermore, every time a specific number of seconds is counted, all the movable bodies are moved and advanced to the advanced position with the widest fluctuation range. As a result, when a timer value is displayed when the timer is displayed, or a specific number of seconds (for example, a well-delimited number of seconds such as 10 seconds) has been counted from the timer value that is the starting point, the movable body can be moved. It is possible to suggest both by the number and the range of variation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, one pair of movable bodies out of the plurality of pairs of movable bodies moves. In addition, the plurality of pairs of movable bodies are configured so that the range of variation from the home position differs for each pair when they are moved. According to this configuration, the fact that the predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point is indicated by both the pair of movable bodies and the variation range thereof. becomes possible. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as a special effect in the timer count effect, as shown in FIG. When an effect is performed in which the timer value is counted for a time longer than the elapsed time, the movable body is configured to move in a special variation mode. According to this configuration, when the provision of an advantageous privilege (expectation for a big win) is suggested in the special effect in such a timer count effect, the movable body changes in a special variation mode different from the normal variation mode. Since it is movable, the player can easily understand that the provision of an advantageous privilege has been suggested just by seeing that the movable body has changed in a special manner. In other words, the player watches with anticipation whether or not the movable body moves in a special variation mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the plurality of movable bodies sequentially (clockwise) move, and each of the plurality of movable bodies After sequentially advancing to a predetermined advanced position, the advanced state is maintained until all the movable bodies are moved. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate by both the moving movable body and its advancing state that the predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point. Become. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 63, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is configured such that different types of movable bodies move simultaneously each time a specific number of seconds is counted. According to this configuration, it is possible to count a specific number of seconds (for example, a number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good interval) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. It becomes possible to suggest by the type of the movable body. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the character image as the specific image is changed in a predetermined manner. More specifically, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the display mode of the character image as the specific image changes from a visible display mode to a difficult-to-view display mode. According to this configuration, by changing the display mode of the character image as the specific image, it is suggested that the predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. becomes possible. Furthermore, when the character image changes to a display mode that is difficult to see, the movable body advances to a predetermined advance position. As a result, both the change in the display mode of the character image as the specific image and the movement of the movable body suggest that a predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. it becomes possible to As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the movable body is arranged so as to be visible to the player when it is positioned at the home position, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, the movable body may be arranged so as to be invisible to the player when it is positioned at the home position. Alternatively, only a specific movable accessory out of a plurality of movable bodies may be arranged so as to be visible to the player. With this configuration, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time, the movable body suddenly appears from a position invisible to the player. can improve the interest of Moreover, although the movable bodies are provided at the four corners of the display screen, this is not a limitation, and for example, they may be provided symmetrically in the vertical or horizontal directions other than the four corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the ready-to-win effect are erased in the timer display effect, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, in the timer display effect, the reach patterns of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed behind the movable bodies (upper right first movable role 14a and upper left first movable role 14d) positioned at the home position. You may make it In this case, the entire ready-to-win pattern may be displayed behind the movable body. With this configuration, since the movable body has high transparency, it is possible to perform an effect in which the movable body and the ready-to-win pattern seem to be related to each other, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved. Also, the effect displayed in place of the decorative pattern in the timer display effect may not be the battle effect, and may be, for example, a step-up effect, a story effect, or the like.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the timer image composed of letters and numbers is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed using only numbers. Also, the timer image may be displayed in various fonts and colors, and the fonts and colors may indicate the degree of expectation for the award of the privilege. Furthermore, although the timer image is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, it may be displayed in a countup manner in which the timer value counts up.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is moved each time the timer value is counted for two seconds. You may make it move whenever it counts by time. Also, as shown in FIG. 64, when one character image as a specific image is displayed, it is erased each time the timer value is counted for one second, and when two character images are displayed, the timer value is counted for two seconds. Although the character image is erased each time it is erased, the time period during which the character image is erased can also be arbitrarily set.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when a plurality (two) of character images are displayed as specific images, the timer value counts for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second). Although they are erased one by one, a plurality (two) of them may be erased collectively each time the timer value counts for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds). When the character images are deleted one by one, the displayed character images may be associated with the degree of expectation for the big win, and the order in which the character images are deleted may indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, if a character image with a low degree of expectation for a big win disappears before a character image with a high degree of expectation for a big win disappears, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher than when it disappears later.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the timer image is displayed within the timer image display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed so as to cover part of the timer image display area, straddling the timer image display area and the effect screen being displayed according to the display mode of the timer image shown in FIG. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
a movable body; and
a control means for controlling the movement of the movable body in a predetermined manner;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means displays a predetermined timer image as one of the plurality of display effects, and performs an effect including a display of counting the timer value using the timer image,
The control means may control the movement of the movable body in a predetermined manner each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A3-2]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
Each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A3-3]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
At least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect including displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image,
The second effect is a effect of changing the specific image to a predetermined mode,
The display means may change the specific image to a predetermined mode each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A3-5]
The display means may change the display mode of the specific image from a visible display mode to a difficult-to-view display mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined period of time.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4, characterized by:

The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG. This timer effect is a effect that can be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative pattern synchronized with the variation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (hereinafter also referred to simply as the "special pattern"). At the start of the variable display, at the start of the variable production of the decorative pattern, during the variable production of the decorative pattern, during the reach production (super reach production), etc.). More specifically, this timer effect includes a display of counting the timer value using a timer image and a display of stopping or expiring the timer value at a predetermined value, and the timer value is stopped or expiring at the predetermined value. This is an effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode when the display effect is performed.

[Timer effect A]
65 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A. FIG.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. A middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 65(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), an effect suggesting that a timer effect is possible is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 65(A), the character "Victory!" is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", it is suggested that the timer effect will be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the left center timer image display area TMH of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 65(A). The timer image display area TMH is displayed on the display screen 7a in which part of the effect screen (the variable display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) being displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked) and can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the back side (rear side) of the middle effect screen. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 65(C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a timer effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer expiry effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65(C) is counted down to 0 seconds while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, indicating that the timer value has expired. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and instead of the erased timer image TM, predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the timer image display area TMH. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (expectation of the type of big win) varies depending on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (including In FIG. 65(E), the characters MKE of "chance" are displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(F), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. Characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (including the degree of expectation of the type of the big win) varies depending on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ). Here, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the characters MLG are composed of the same characters as the characters MKE, and are displayed behind the characters MKE in a size larger than the characters MKE. Readably covered. That is, the characters MLG are displayed substantially in the center of the effect image display area EGH positioned behind the timer image display area TMH, and are displayed larger than the characters MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times), and are displayed in the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed and displayed in such a manner that a part thereof can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the characters MLG with the same characters as the characters MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the screen of the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 65(F) is switched. That is, the character MLG and the character MKE shown in FIG. 65(F) are erased, and the ready-to-win effect is executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Timer effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B. FIG.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 66(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), an effect suggesting that a timer effect is possible is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 66(A), this timer effect suggesting effect indicates that the ally character CRA has won, and the words "Victory!" By displaying the characters "victory!", it is suggested that the timer effect will be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the left center timer image display area TMH of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 66(A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 66(C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66(C) is counted down to 5 seconds while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and the timer value is stopped halfway. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 5 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and instead of the erased timer image TM, predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the timer image display area TMH. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (expectation of the type of big win) varies depending on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (including In FIG. 66(E), the characters MKE of "chance" are displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. Characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (including the degree of expectation of the type of the big win) varies according to the type of the specific image (character MLG). ). Here, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the characters MLG are composed of the same characters as the characters MKE, and are displayed behind the characters MKE in a larger size than the characters MKE. Readably covered. That is, the characters MLG are displayed substantially in the center of the effect image display area EGH positioned behind the timer image display area TMH, and are displayed larger than the characters MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times), and are displayed in the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed and displayed in such a manner that a part thereof can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the characters MLG with the same characters as the characters MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), the specific image single effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE that were displayed in the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. be. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the character MLG changes its display mode from the horizontal display mode in the specific image superimposition effect to the oblique display mode (downward to the right), and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters MLG as a whole, the player can fully see the characters MLG displayed as a specific image related to the provision of advantageous benefits to the player, and can more accurately understand the current game state. You can grasp it and have great expectations for further developments after that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the screen of the specific image single effect shown in FIG. 66(G) is switched. That is, the characters MLG shown in FIG. 66(G) are erased, and the ready-to-win effect is executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C. FIG.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the right pattern display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 67(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 67A shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a timer effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer expiry effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67(A) is counted down to 0 seconds while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, indicating that the timer value has expired. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and instead of the erased timer image TM, predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the timer image display area TMH. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (expectation of the type of jackpot) varies depending on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (including In FIG. 67(C), the characters MKE of "chance" are displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and instead of the erased decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. . These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the provision of advantageous benefits to the player. (Including the expectation level of the jackpot type) is suggested (jackpot expectation level: character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are characters different from the character MKE (characters MSG1 of "rapid heat", characters MSG2 of "suspension change", characters MSG3 of "NEXT"). and is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE in substantially the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction. Displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH positioned behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. , characters MLG are displayed in the effect image display area EGH. This character MLG is the same character as the character MKE, is displayed behind the character MKE and is larger than the character MKE, and is partly covered with the character MKE so as to be readable. That is, the characters MLG are displayed substantially in the center of the effect image display area EGH positioned behind the timer image display area TMH, and are displayed larger than the characters MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times), and are displayed in the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed and displayed in such a manner that a part thereof can be read by the characters MKE. That is, in the timer image change effect (Fig. 67(C)), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed as the specific image do not have the same character ("chance") as the character MKE, and the subsequent specific image superimposition effect ( In FIG. 67(D), instead of the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3, characters MLG are displayed as specific images of the same characters as the characters MKE. In this way, when the characters MLG that are the same as the characters MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH are displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the degree of expectation for the big win of the variation is the highest (the degree of expectation for the big win: character MLG>Letter MSG1>Letter MSG2>Letter MSG3). By displaying the characters MLG that are the same as the characters MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the specific image single effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE that were displayed in the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. be. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the character MLG changes its display mode from the horizontal display mode in the specific image superimposition effect to the oblique display mode (downward to the right), and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters MLG as a whole, the player can fully see the characters MLG displayed as a specific image related to the provision of advantageous benefits to the player, and can more accurately understand the current game state. You can grasp it and have great expectations for further developments after that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the variable probability reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this variable probability reach effect, the screen of the specific image single effect shown in FIG. 67(E) is switched. That is, the characters MLG shown in FIG. 67(E) are erased, and the variable probability reach effect is executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the variable probability jackpot ready-to-win pattern arrangement on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit.

On the other hand, assume that "NEXT" is displayed as the characters MLG as shown in FIG. 67(G) instead of FIG. 67(D) in the specific image superimposition effect. That is, in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67(G), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. , MSG3, characters MLG are displayed in the effect image display area EGH as the specific image. This character MLG is not the same character as the character MKE (“chance”), but is displayed by enlarging (for example, 3 to 5 times) the character MSG3 (“NEXT”). That is, in this specific image superimposition effect, MSG3 is selected from characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67(C)), and character MLG is displayed behind the timer image display area TMH. The character MKE is displayed substantially in the center of the effect image display area EGH located at . Thus, when the characters MLG that are not the same as the characters MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH are displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the variation is greater than when the same characters MLG are displayed. , the degree of expectation for the jackpot is low (the degree of expectation for the jackpot: character MLG>character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). By displaying the characters MLG that are not the same as the characters MKE, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As described above, when the characters MLG identical to the characters MKE are displayed in the specific image superimposed effect, the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. However, when characters MLG that are not the same as the characters MKE are displayed in the specific image superimposed effect, the specific image independent effect is omitted and the normal ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 67(H) is executed. In this normal ready-to-win effect, the screen of the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 67(G) is switched, and on the display screen 7a, the normal ready-to-win effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the normal jackpot ready-to-win pattern arrangement is performed. executed. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "888" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game is finished, the number of times the special patterns are varied is 100 times. A game state becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state), and after that, it is a jackpot that becomes a low-probability-low base state (normal state).

[Timer effect D]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D. FIG.
In the timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the right pattern display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 66(C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value. Further, when the timer image TM is displayed, a battle effect is performed at the center of the display screen 7a instead of displaying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. Although not shown, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a timer effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer expiry effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 68(A) is counted down to 0 seconds while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, indicating that the timer value has expired. It is shown. Also, on the display screen 7a, the battle effect continues. In this battle presentation, an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and instead of the erased timer image TM, predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the timer image display area TMH. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the degree of expectation of the big win (expectation of the type of jackpot) varies depending on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (including In FIG. 68(C), the characters MKE of "chance" are displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and instead of the erased decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. . These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the provision of advantageous benefits to the player. (Including the expectation level of the jackpot type) is suggested (jackpot expectation level: character MSG1>character MSG2>character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are characters different from the characters MKE (the characters MSG1 "participate", the characters MSG2 "hold change", and the characters MSG3 "NEXT"). It is configured and displayed behind the characters MKE in substantially the same size as the characters MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction. Displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH positioned behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG2 and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. be. That is, the character MSG1 is changed in display mode to the character MLG as the specific image, and displayed in the effect image display area EGH. Furthermore, the characters MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH are changed from "chance" to "participation" and displayed enlarged. That is, the characters MKE as the first display mode of the specific image and the characters MLG as the second display mode of the specific image are displayed with the same characters. Thus, the characters MLG are displayed behind the characters MKE in a larger size than the characters MKE, and partially covered by the characters MKE so as to be readable. That is, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the characters MLG are displayed substantially in the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and are displayed larger than the characters MKE (for example, 2 3 times), the timer image display area TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed and displayed in such a manner that a part thereof can be read by the characters MKE. In this way, when the characters MLG identical to the characters MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH are displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the expected level of the variation of the jackpot is the highest (the expected level of the big win: character MLG>Letter MSG2>Letter MSG3). By displaying the same characters MLG as the characters MKE, and moreover, the characters MKE are changed and enlarged to be displayed in the same characters as the characters MLG. Further developments can be expected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the specific image character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image character effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 68(D), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the character MLG changes its display mode from the horizontal display mode in the specific image superimposition effect to the oblique (lower right) display mode, and is entirely displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the name CNA ("OARO") of the character CRC is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This character CRC is displayed based on the fact that "participation" is displayed as the characters MLG. A character who fights. There are a plurality of types of character CRCs displayed in the specific image character presentation, and the type of character CRC suggests the degree of expectation for a big win (including the degree of expectation for the type of big win). It should be noted that "OARO" as the character CRC displayed here is assumed to be a character with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. Since the characters MLG are displayed in their entirety, the player can completely see the characters MLG displayed as a specific image related to giving advantageous benefits to the player, and can more accurately grasp the current game state. With the emergence of the character CRC "OARO", which can be grasped and has a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, it is possible to have great expectations for further developments after that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a variable probability reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variable ready-to-reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(E) is switched. That is, the character MLG, the character CRC, and the name CNA shown in FIG. 68(E) are erased, and the variable reach performance is executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern array of the variable probability jackpot on the display screen 7a. be done. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific image character presentation, assume that the name CNA (“ZERO”) is displayed as the character CRC as shown in FIG. 68(G) instead of FIG. 68(E). "ZERO" as the character CRC is a character with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, and has a lower degree of expectation for a big win than the aforementioned "OARO". That is, in the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(G), from the display state of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. A character "ZERO" with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed. In this way, by displaying the character CRC with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win in the specific image character presentation, the player cannot have much expectation for subsequent developments.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal ready-to-win effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68(G) is switched, and on the display screen 7a, the normal ready-to-win effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the normal jackpot ready-to-win pattern arrangement. executed. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "888" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game is finished, the number of times the special patterns are varied is 100 times. A game state becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state), and after that, it is a jackpot that becomes a low-probability-low base state (normal state).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first effect is to display a predetermined timer image, count the timer value using the timer image, and count the timer value. The second effect is an effect including the display of a specific image related to giving advantageous benefits to the player, and the timer value is the predetermined value in the first effect. When the display effect of stopping or ending is performed, the effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode is performed as the second effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value is stopped or expired at the predetermined value, the specific image related to giving advantageous benefits to the player is displayed. You can enjoy the game while watching with anticipation. Further, since the specific image is displayed simultaneously in the first display mode and the second display mode, by variously changing the combination of these display modes, the player's degree of expectation for the development of the game thereafter can be changed. can be made This can make the player happy and sad. Furthermore, by associating the stopped timer value with the specific image, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the player according to the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which the timer image is displayed at the display position of the timer image instead of the timer image. The second display mode is a display mode in which a portion displayed behind the timer image is covered with the specific image of the first display mode. According to this configuration, the player can guess the specific image displayed in the second display mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image is a predetermined character, and the same character is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image. It is a display mode, and the characters of the second display mode partially covered by the characters of the first display mode are configured to be a readable display mode. According to this configuration, although the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode are partially covered, they are the same characters as the characters displayed in the first display mode, and are displayed in a readable display mode. Therefore, the player can accurately guess the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode, and enjoy the game with great anticipation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the characters in the first display mode are erased, the characters in the second display mode change their display mode and are displayed entirely. It is configured. According to this configuration, the partially covered characters in the second display mode are displayed in their entirety, so that the player can verify whether or not the characters in the second display mode guessed by him/herself are correct. can be done. Furthermore, since the character in the second display mode changes its display mode when it is displayed in its entirety, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the player by, for example, varying this display mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the entire display of the second display mode is erased, the decorative symbols are displayed in the ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, when the characters in the second display mode are displayed in their entirety, the game is always reachable. Furthermore, by associating the characters in the second display mode with the degree of expectation for a big win, it is also possible to change the degree of expectation for a big win according to the characters in the second display mode displayed in its entirety. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image displayed in place of the timer value in the timer image display area displays predetermined characters. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be a symbol, a mark, a pattern, a character, or an image of an object or article having a specific shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the timer display effects are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer display effect may be such that the timer value changes irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. Also, in the timer display effect, 10 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer, but this is not limited to 10 seconds and is arbitrary. Furthermore, in the timer stop effect shown in FIG. 66, the timer image change effect is executed when the timer value stops at 5 seconds, but this is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the specific image single effect (FIGS. 65 and 66) or the specific image character effect (FIG. 68) is executed from the specific image superimposed effect, The character as the specific image is changed from the horizontal display mode to the oblique display mode (downward to the right) so that the entire display mode is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, instead of the oblique shape, the display mode may be changed into an arc shape, a vertical shape, a zigzag shape, or the like, and the entire display may be performed. In this case, the color may also change. Furthermore, it is also possible to change the display mode into a plurality of types, and to change the degree of expectation for a big win depending on which type the display mode changes.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, three characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images in the effect image display area in the timer image change effect. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of these specific images may be other than three, and may be at least two. These specific images may be images other than characters, such as symbols, marks, patterns, characters, or objects or articles having specific shapes. Furthermore, among these specific images, the same image (for example, "chance") as the specific image displayed in the timer image display area may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, one character participates in the specific image character presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image character presentation, a plurality of characters may participate. In addition, the characters participating in the war battle with the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. may In this case, a plurality of character colors may be provided for the characters MLG of "participation", and depending on the character color, it may be determined whether the characters participating in the battle will be attached to the ally character CRA or the enemy character CRB.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect including displaying a predetermined timer image, counting the timer value using the timer image, and stopping or expiring the timer value at a predetermined value,
The second effect is a effect including displaying a specific image related to giving advantageous benefits to the player,
The display means displays the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect when the timer value is stopped or terminated at a predetermined value in the first effect. to display at the same time,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A4-2]
the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which the timer image is displayed at a display position of the timer image instead of the timer image;
The second display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which a portion displayed behind the timer image is covered with the specific image of the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-3]
The specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image are display modes in which the same character is displayed,
The characters in the second display mode partially covered by the characters in the first display mode are in a readable display mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-4]
When the characters in the first display mode are erased, the characters in the second display mode change in display mode and are displayed entirely.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect A4-5]
Equipped with decorative pattern display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative patterns,
The decorative pattern display means displays the decorative pattern in a ready-to-win state when the entire display of the second display mode is erased.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4, characterized by:

The image transparent display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. FIG. This image transmissive display effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the image transparent display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Image transparent display effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmissive display effect A, a specific image (let's go image) IZ of "SMILE Let's Go!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the variable effect. This image becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 69B, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of mutually different positions on the light guide plate 17 while the image IZ is being displayed. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, as shown in FIG. A possible superimposition effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(C) to 69(E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. As shown in FIG. 69(D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. state. The image IZ is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. The displayed composite effect is executed. At this time, the character image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a moves within the display screen 7a, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Sometimes two or three of the smile images SL, overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(F) and 69(G), the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is randomly displayed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which each of the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is repeatedly switched between a visually recognizable state and a visually unrecognizable state at random. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17 . Further, the number of images IZ on the display screen 7a may be displayed plurally or may be displayed singly within the display screen 7a, and may be moved or stopped. As a result, two or three of the character image MJ, the image IZ, and the smile image SL are sometimes superimposed and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) to 69(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a non-visible state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

[Image transparent display effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the image transmissive display effect B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 70(A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmissive display effect B, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, a timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the variable display is being performed. The timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 . The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc., other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and made visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(C) to 70(E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. As shown in FIG. 70(D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. state. The display screen 7a continues to display the timer image TM1, the first movable accessory 14 continues to display the character image MJ, and the light guide plate 17 continues to display the smile image SL at random positions. A composite effect is executed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of the character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL are sometimes superimposed and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(F) and 70(G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which each of the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is repeatedly switched between a visually recognizable state and a visually unrecognizable state at random. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17 . Also, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL At times the two overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(H) to 70(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a non-visible state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero), an expectation indication image EI1 indicating the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. be done. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 71(A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmissive display effect C, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the decorative pattern repeats the variable display and the stationary display, and the stationary display is shown here. In this way, when the decorative symbols repeat the variable display and stop display, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, this timer image TM1 is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. This timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 . The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc., other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after some time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a plurality of smiley images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of mutually different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the stop-displayed decorative pattern or timer image TM1 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and visible. be As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, so that it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 71C and 71D, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 70(D), the next timer value image NT showing transparent "4" superimposed on the current timer value "5" is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" protrude from the display screen 7a. The size and display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is displayed, while shrinking while being superimposed on the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the image area where the counter value is displayed in the timer image TM1 in size and display position, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position of the portion of "5" of the timer image TM1 are the same, and "4" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the "5" of TM1 matches in size and position, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(D) and FIG. 71(E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. As shown in FIG. 71(D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held.

In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. state. The display screen 7a continues to display the timer image TM1, the first movable accessory 14 continues to display the character image MJ, and the light guide plate 17 continues to display the smile image SL at random positions. A composite effect is executed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of the character image MJ, timer image TM1, and smile image SL are sometimes superimposed and visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(F) and 71(G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which each of the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is repeatedly switched between a visually recognizable state and a visually unrecognizable state at random. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17 . Also, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL At times the two overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(H) to 71(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a non-visible state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero), an expectation indication image EI1 indicating the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. be done. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect D]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect D. FIG. As shown in FIG. 72(A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmissive display effect C, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a plurality of smiley images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears as shown in FIG. 72(E), the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 72(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 are performed. These effects are the same as the image transparent display effect C. FIG. That is, in the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. state. The variable display of decorative patterns is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. A composite effect in which is displayed is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL are sometimes overlapped and become visible. After that, the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without the first movable accessory 14 (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(I), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of mutually different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 72(J), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started. In addition, in the above description, it is assumed that the display is performed over a plurality of variable displays, but it may be performed in one variation. That is, it may be performed during the pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, FIG. 72(B) and FIG. 72(H) may be a temporary stop display.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image transparent display rendering will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the light guide plate 17 that can switch the smile image SL between the visible state and the difficult-to-visible state, and the character image MJ in the visible state and the difficult-to-visible state. The light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the character image MJ displayed on the first movable accessory 14 through the light guide plate 17 is provided. can execute an image transmissive display effect that makes visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, the character image MJ displayed on the first movable accessory 14 is visible through the light guide plate 17. An effect is included in which the smile image SL becomes visible on the light guide plate 17 . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the character image MJ displayed on the first movable accessory 14 are used for the image transmissive display effect. Includes effects that overlap and become visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17, the smile image SL alternately becomes visible and invisible. Includes repetitive performances. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable. An effect in which the movable accessory 14 moves is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 has transparency, and the gaming machine 1 further allows the image IZ to be visually recognized and visually recognized. It has a display screen 7a that can be switched between a difficult state and a difficult state, and in the image transmissive display effect, the image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a is visually recognized via the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. Includes possible renditions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light guide plate 17 that can switch the smile image SL between the visible state and the invisible state, and the timer image TM1 can be switched between the visible state and the invisible state. and a display screen 7a that can be switched between two states, the light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Transparent display rendering can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the image transparent display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, it is assumed that several images IZ are displayed on the display screen 7a. However, an image having contents different from the image IZ may be displayed on the display screen 7a in the same manner as the image IZ. For example, it may be a specific character image, or a specific character, figure, symbol, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image transparent display effects shown in FIGS. 69 to 72 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the image transmissive display effect A of FIG. 69, a variable display of decorative patterns as shown in FIG. 72 and an explosion effect after displaying the smile image SL may be combined. Also, the timer image TM1 of FIG. 70 or 71 may be displayed in the image transmissive display effect D of FIG.
[Modification 3]
70 and 71, it is assumed that the timer value of the timer image TM1 finally becomes zero. However, the timer value of timer image TM1 may end at a value other than zero. For example, the first expectation suggestive image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2). It should be noted that in the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 70 and 71, the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 4]
69 to 72, the smile image SL and the timer image TM1 are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory . However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
a first image display area in which the first image can be switched between a visible state and a non-visible state;
A gaming machine comprising a second image display area capable of switching a second image between a visible state and a non-visible state,
The first image display area has transparency, and a specific effect can be executed in which the second image displayed in the second image display area becomes visible through the first image display area. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the specific effect, the first image is visible in the first image display area in a state in which the second image displayed in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area. A game machine characterized by including a possible effect.
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
The specific effect includes a effect in which the first image displayed in the first image display area and the second image displayed in the second image display area overlap and become visible. Amusement machine.
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific effect includes a effect that alternately repeats a state in which the first image is visible and a state in which the first image is not visible at a plurality of different positions in the first image area.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
The second image display area is configured to be movable,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect includes an effect in which the second image display area is moved while the second image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5,
The second image display area has transparency,
The gaming machine further comprises
a third image display area capable of switching between a state in which the third image is visible and a state in which the third image is not visible;
The specific effect includes a effect that the third image displayed in the third image display area becomes visible through the first image display area and the second image display area. game machine.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
A gaming machine, wherein the second image is a timer image.

The image combination effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. This image combination effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the image combination effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect that displays an image on the .

[Image combination effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect A. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 73(A), in the image combination effect A, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entirety of the character partial images BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14, and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smiley face character image. Here, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the outline of the smiley face character image, and provides an effect as if light is coming out of the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be entertained.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73(E) and 73(F), the retraction movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(F), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). As shown in FIG. 73(G), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73(H) to 73(J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a non-visible state on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining image combination effect B. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a visible state and a non-visible state of an image, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 74(A), in the image combination effect B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a to perform the decorative design fluctuation production (variation display). . Also, an effect image EF is displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display and effect image EF become visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

The effect image EF is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the smile face character image formed by the entirety of the character partial images BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the effect image. Image combination effect is executed by EF. Specifically, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the outline of the smiley face character image, and provides an effect as if light is coming out of the smiley face character image. Therefore, the effect image EF can be said to be an image related to the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be entertained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D) and FIG. 74(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The effect image EF and the variable display are continuously displayed and can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 . After that, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the effect image EF disappears.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 74(G) and 74(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a follow-up image TJ following (interlocked with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image that is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members that constitute the first movable accessory 14, and the shape and the shape of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. In other words, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members. Here, the four transparent members each have a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each follow-up image TJ includes a character's face image, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the areas of the display screen 7a that are the rear surfaces of the four transmissive members are reduced, so the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. Due to such an effect, the follow-up image TJ appears to the player as if it were displayed on four translucent members. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect C. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a visible state and a non-visible state of an image, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 75(A), in the image combination effect C, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), with the smile image DS being displayed on the display screen 7a, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, a partial character image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object. The smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN has the same size and content as the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a, and these two images are superimposed. Therefore, it can be said that the smiley image DS displayed on the display screen 7a is an image related to the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the character images DS, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be entertained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The smile image DS is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be visually recognized without the first movable accessory 14 being interposed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(E), the smile image DS disappears, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decoration pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 75(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 are performed. In the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes superimposed and become visible. A performance is held. In the second mode in which the first movable accessory 14 has completely moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. state. The variable display of decorative patterns is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. A composite effect in which is displayed is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL are sometimes overlapped and become visible. After that, the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without the first movable accessory 14 (second aspect). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(J), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. In the above description, it is assumed that the display is performed over a plurality of variable displays, but it may be performed with one variable. That is, it may be performed during the pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, FIG. 75(E) and FIG. 75(J) may be a temporary stop display.

[Image combination effect D]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect D. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 76(A), in the image combination effect D, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, a partial character image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entirety of the character partial images BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14, and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smiley face character image. Here, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the outline of the smiley face character image, and provides an effect as if light is coming out of the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be entertained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), the light guide plate display change effect is executed. Specifically, the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the character images MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smiley image SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 A superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the image is sometimes superimposed and visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character image MJ to the character partial image BN. That is, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transmissive members. As a result, a smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are visible on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the character images MJ of each of the four transmissive members and the smiley image SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 A superimposed effect is performed in which the smile image SL is sometimes superimposed and can be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H) and FIG. 75(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, character images MJ of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly visible on each of the four transparent members. In addition, since the smiley image SL of the light guide plate 17 is displayed at random, a superimposition effect is performed in which the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smiley image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped and visually recognized. . After that, as shown in FIG. 75(J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image combination effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the first movable accessory 14 having transmissive and movable four image display areas (movable light guide plate) has four image display areas. , can transition between a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other, and can switch between a state in which the character partial image BN is visible and a state in which the character partial image BN is not visible. In the first state, by making each of the character partial images BN visible, the four character partial images BN as a whole form one smiley face character image. can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a display screen 7a capable of switching between the visible state and the invisible state of the image, and the image display area of the first movable accessory 14. An image displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the (movable light guide plate), and in the first effect, an effect image EF related to the smile face character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 are in the second state, respectively, on the display screen 7a. They are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, and when transitioning from the second state to the first state, they each move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, after the first effect, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 transition to the second state. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 each display a character image MJ different from the character partial image BN. A second state in which the character image MJ is switchable between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state, and in which the character image MJ repeats the visible state and the difficult-to-visible state while transitioning from the first state to the second state. can perform the performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with a light guide plate 17 capable of switching between an image visible state and an image invisible state. As a result, the smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN becomes visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the image combination effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 73, four character partial images BN displayed on four members (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 form a smile face character image as a whole. However, the target of the overall image represented by the overall partial images displayed on the four members (movable light guide plates) is not limited to the character image. For example, the whole image may be specific characters, graphics, symbols, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image combination effects shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the image combination effect A of FIG. 73, a variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 75 and an explosion effect after displaying the smile image SL may be combined. Also, a follow-up image TJ as shown in FIG. 74 may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
73 to 76, the smile image SL and the character image MJ are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory . However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of transparent and movable first image display areas,
The plurality of first image display areas are
capable of transitioning between a first state relatively close to each other and a second state relatively distant;
Each can switch between a state in which a predetermined image can be viewed and a state in which it is difficult to view,
In the first state, by making each of the predetermined images visible, it is possible to execute a first effect of forming an image representing a specific object with the plurality of predetermined images as a whole. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 further comprises
Equipped with a second image display area that can switch between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state of the image,
an image displayed in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area;
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, an image related to the image representing the specific target is displayed in the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
The plurality of first image display areas are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to four corners of the second image display area when in the second state, and when the state changes from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning, each moves toward the vicinity of the center of the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
After the first effect, the plurality of first image display areas transition to the second state.
◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The plurality of first image display areas are
Each image can be switched between a visible state and a non-visible state, and
While transitioning from the first state to the second state, it is possible to execute a second effect that repeats a state in which an image different from the specific image is visible and a state in which it is difficult to be visible. game machine.
◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5, further comprising:
Equipped with a third image display area that can switch between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state of the image,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, an image representing the specific object becomes visible through the third image display area.

Interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. This interlocking production can be executed during the variable production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the interlocking production is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect that displays an image.

[Interlocking production A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect A. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. In addition, each of the four transmissive members is configured to be movable in front of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the interlocking production A, the decorative design variation production (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a. This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, a partial character image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smiling face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

At this time, a related image display effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entirety of the character partial images BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14, and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. An image associated with the facial character image may be displayed. For example, the effect image EF may be displayed according to the outline of the smiley face character image. If the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the outline of the smiley face character image, the effect is such that light is emitted from the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be further entertained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D) and FIG. 77(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. After that, each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14 (first mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), FIG. 77(G), and FIG. 74(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a (transitions from the first mode to the second mode). At this time, a follow-up image TJ following (interlocked with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image that is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members that constitute the first movable accessory 14, and the shape and the shape of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. In other words, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members. Here, the four transparent members each have a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. In other words, the four follow-up images TJ have shapes that follow the contours of the four transmissive members. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. In this interlocking effect, when the four transmission areas (members having transparency) transition from the first mode to the second mode, the four follow-up images TJ move in conjunction with the movement of each of the four transmission areas, Each of the following images TJ in motion can be visually recognized through each of the four transmissive regions in motion. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each follow-up image TJ includes a character's face image, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the areas of the display screen 7a that are the rear surfaces of the four transmissive members are reduced, so the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. Due to such an effect, the follow-up image TJ appears to the player as if it were displayed on four translucent members. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area without the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a plurality of smiley images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. Due to this superimposed effect, the statically displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, so that it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Interlocking production B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining interlocking effect B. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 78A, in the interlocking effect B, the face image KG following (interlocking) the movement of the four translucent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. At least a part of the face image KG is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members that constitute the first movable accessory 14 . Therefore, from the player's point of view, the facial image KG is partially visible through the four transmissive members. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The facial image KG and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. At this time, the four face images KG on the display screen 7a respectively follow (interlock) with the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14 and move. As a result, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the four transmissive members and partly visible through the four transmissive members while the four transmissive members are moving. It becomes a state that can be visually recognized without passing through the member having the

During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a movable character object combination effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap between them. By this movable character uniting effect, the four character partial images BN are close to each other, and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entirety of the character partial images BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14, and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smiley face character image. The effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smiley face character image, and provides an effect as if light is coming out of the smiley face character image. In this way, the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smiley face), and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined. Thereby, the player can be further entertained. The four face images KG are continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D) and FIG. 78(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the four face images KG on the display screen 7a respectively follow (interlock) with the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14 and move. As a result, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the four transmissive members and partly visible through the four transmissive members while the four transmissive members are moving. It becomes a state that can be visually recognized without passing through the member having the

During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(E), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a becomes visible without the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(F), 78(G), and 78(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display screen 7a displays a frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members. The frame image WG is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, which is the rear surface of the four translucent members that constitute the first movable accessory 14. They have almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, inside the frame image WG, a combination effect is executed in which the character image MJ represented by four transparent members becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG follows the movement of the four transparent members and moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the areas on the display screen 7a that are the rear surfaces of the four transmissive members are reduced, so that only a portion of the frame image WG is displayed. part shrinks. Due to such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members when viewed from the player. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area without the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a. A plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Interlocking production C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect C. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a visible state and a non-visible state of an image, which will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 79(A), 79(B), and 79(C), in the interlocking effect C, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. The display screen 7a displays four timer images TM that follow (interlock with) the movements of the four transparent members. The timer image TM is an image displayed in the area on the display screen 7a, which is the rear surface of the four transparent members that constitute the first movable accessory 14, and is a two-digit number representing a timer value (count value). digit image (digital display image). The timer image TM has a frame image having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the four transparent members. The frame image has a shape along the outer shape of the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image also has the same rectangular shape. When viewed from the player, the timer image TM appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four timer images TM are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the four timer images TM start counting down immediately after being displayed, but may start counting down after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after being displayed. Also, here, different timer values "10", "14", "15", and "12" are set in the four timer images TM, respectively, and the respective timer values are decremented. The timer value can be decremented faster or slower than seconds. Here the decrement speed is the same as seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(D) and 79(E), when the timer value of one of the timer images TM (upper left here) becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and , of the first movable accessory 14, the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM is executed. Specifically, from a state in which one of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 (here, the upper left) covers the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a is shifted to the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. move towards The other three transparent members do not move. The upper left timer image TM whose timer value is 0 (zero) follows (links with) the movement of the upper left transparent member and moves. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, part of the variable display becomes visible in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(F) and 79(G), when the timer value of the next one (here, lower right) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), that timer image TM and the evacuation movement effect of the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM among the first movable accessories 14 are executed. Specifically, from the state in which one of the remaining three members covering the display screen 7a among the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a, the display It moves toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining two transparent members do not move. The lower right timer image TM with a timer value of 0 (zero) moves following (interlocked with) the movement of the lower right transparent member. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, part of the variable display becomes visible in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79H, when the timer value of the next one (upper right here) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), that timer image TM and the first movable A retraction movement effect is executed for a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the accessory 14 . Specifically, from the state in which one of the remaining two members covering the display screen 7a among the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a, the display It moves toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining permeable member does not move. The upper right timer image TM with a timer value of 0 (zero) moves following (interlocked with) the movement of the upper right transparent member. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, part of the variable display becomes visible in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(I) and 79(J), when the timer value of the last one (here, the lower left) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM , and the evacuation movement effect of the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM among the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Then, after the entire variable display becomes visible, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79(J).

[Interlocking production D]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect D. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a visible state and a non-visible state of an image, which will be described later.

In the interlocking production D, as shown in FIGS. 80(A), 80(B), and 80(C), the advancing movement production of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display screen 7a displays a frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members. The frame image WG is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, which is the rear surface of the four translucent members that constitute the first movable accessory 14. They have almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area of the display screen 7a that is the rear surface of the four transmissive members. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display), which can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17. It has become.

During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. Here, a combination effect is executed in which the character partial image BN becomes visible inside the frame image WG. By moving each of the four translucent members to the advanced position, the four character partial images BN are brought close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advanced position, the four character partial images BN as a whole can form an image (smiley face character image) representing one specific object.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D) and FIG. 80(E), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other. At this time, the four frame images WG on the display screen 7a move toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the areas on the display screen 7a that are the rear surfaces of the four transmissive members are reduced, so that only a portion of the frame image WG is displayed. part shrinks. Due to such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members when viewed from the player.

As shown in FIG. 80(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the visible area of the display screen 7a without passing through the first movable accessory 14. be done. A plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 80(E), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, as shown in FIG. 80(F), the next variable display is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(F), 80(G), and 80(H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display screen 7a continues to display the frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members. Due to the structure similar to that described above, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members when viewed from the player. Almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by each of the four transmissive members moving to the advanced position (second aspect). Also, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, inside the frame image WG, a combination effect is executed in which the character image MJ represented by four transparent members becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG follows the movement of the four transparent members and moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the areas on the display screen 7a that are the rear surfaces of the four transmissive members are reduced, so that only a portion of the frame image WG is displayed. part shrinks. Due to such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members when viewed from the player. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area without the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a. A plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17 . In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL on the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL becomes visible at random positions on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 becomes visible at random overlapping the statically displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the statically displayed decorative symbols explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the statically displayed decorative pattern, thereby making it possible to produce an effect as if the decorative pattern was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the interlocking production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIG. 77, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the transparent and movable first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a capable of displaying an image. 14 is movable in front of the display screen 7a, and the first movable accessory 14 and the follow-up image TJ displayed on the display screen 7a move together to move the first movable accessory during movement. 14, it is possible to execute an interlocking effect in which the following image TJ that is moving can be visually recognized. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the first movable accessory 14 includes four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) that are transmissive and movable. The transmissive areas can transition between a first mode in which they are relatively close to each other and a second mode in which they are relatively separated, and in the interlocking effect, the four transmissive areas transition from the first mode to the second mode. At this time, the four tracking images TJ move in conjunction with the movement of each of the four transmissive areas, and each of the moving following images TJ can be visually recognized through each of the four transmissive areas that are moving. Become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 respectively correspond to the four corners of the display screen 7a in the second mode. , and move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second mode to the first mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the follow-up image TJ has a shape that conforms to the outer shape of each of the four transmissive regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, each of the four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 can display the character partial image BN, and the transmissive areas can be displayed. It is possible to execute a combined effect of the character partial image BN that is displayed and the effect image EF that is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 77, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes a light guide plate 17 having transparency and arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a. , and a smile image SL can be displayed, and a combined effect can be executed by the smile image SL displayed by the light guide plate 17 and the decoration pattern displayed by the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of interlocking production|presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
The follow-up image TJ in FIG. 77 is not limited to the above configuration. The follow-up image TJ may be, for example, an image having a shape roughly following the contours of the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14, or a part of the contours of the four members (movable light guide plate). It may be an image having a shape along the . The shape roughly along means a shape that allows the player to recognize that the outer shape of the four members (movable light guide plate) and the shape of the follow-up image TJ correspond to each other.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the interlocking effects shown in FIGS. 77 to 80 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the interlocking effect A in FIG. 77, the timer image TM as shown in FIG.
[Modification 3]
77 to 80, the smile image SL and the character image MJ displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14 may be displayed at random, or may be displayed with a certain regularity. may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
a transparent and movable movable accessory;
and an image display area capable of displaying an image,
The movable accessory is movable in front of the image display area,
By moving the movable accessory and the specific image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other, an interlocking effect is provided in which the moving specific image can be visually recognized through the moving movable accessory. A game machine characterized by being executable.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
each of the movable objects includes a plurality of transmissive areas that are transmissive and movable,
The plurality of transmissive regions can transition between a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated,
In the interlocking effect, when the plurality of transparent areas transition from the first state to the second state, the plurality of specific images move and move in conjunction with the movement of each of the plurality of transparent areas. A gaming machine, wherein each of the specific images during movement is visible through each of the plurality of transparent areas inside.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
The plurality of transmissive areas are arranged at positions corresponding to four corners of the image display area when in the second state, and when transitioning from the second state to the first state, each A gaming machine characterized in that each moves toward the vicinity of the center of the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2 or aspect A7-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific image has a shape along the outer shape of each of the plurality of transmissive areas.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
each of the plurality of transparent areas is capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine capable of executing a combined presentation of an image displayed by the transmissive area and an image displayed by the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5, further comprising:
It has a transparent front area arranged in front of the movable accessory and the image display area,
The front region is capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine capable of executing a combined effect of an image displayed by the front area and an image displayed by the image display area.

The suspended icon image matching effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. FIG. This pending icon image matching effect can be executed during a change of special symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon image matching effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are retrieved from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This pending icon image matching effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). It should be noted that the pending icon image matching effect may be performed during a plurality of variations of the special symbols (a plurality of variation effects).

[Hold icon image matching effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon image matching effect A. FIG.
In the pending icon image matching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB1 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the rhombic image XB11 is arranged in the rectangular image XB12. The diamond-shaped image XB11 has a brick-like pattern, and the character "S" is shown in the center.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB1 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB1 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a pending icon change effect is executed. In this pending icon change effect, the rhomboid image XB11 of the specific image XB1 sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the pending icon display area where the pending icons are displayed. Hold change (one of the look-ahead effects) to the same shape as the rhombic image XB11. Note that the size of the pending icon 9A that has changed to the same shape as the diamond-shaped image XB11 is smaller than the diamond-shaped image XB11.
That is, in this suspended icon image matching effect A, one of the suspended icons changes to the same shape as a portion of the specific image XB1 (rhombic image XB11) reduced.

[Holding Icon Image Matching Effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image matching effect B. FIG.
In the pending icon image matching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is rhombic, has a brick-like pattern, and has the letter "S" in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB2 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a pending icon change effect is executed. In this pending icon change effect, the character CRA makes an action to push out the specific image XB2 sucked up in the direction of the pending icon display area where the pending icons are displayed, so that one of the pending icons 9A has the same shape as the specific image XB2. Hold change (one of the look-ahead effects) to . Note that the size of the pending icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in this suspended icon image matching effect B, one of the suspended icons changes to the same shape as the reduced specific image XB2 itself.

[Hold icon image matching effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon image matching effect C. FIG.
In the pending icon image matching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is rhombic, has a brick-like pattern, and has the letter "S" in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the third movable accessory effect is executed. In this third movable accessory presentation, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is positioned inside the third movable accessory 18.例文帳に追加In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18 . Here, the integrally formed object (mark, design object) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also called a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA stores the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) in the character CRA so as to suck it. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to its home position.
At the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a pending icon change effect is executed. In this pending icon change effect, the character CRA makes an action to push out the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) sucked up in the direction of the pending icon display area where the pending icons are displayed, thereby one of the pending icons 9A becomes the specified mark. Hold change (one of the look-ahead effects) to the same shape as the image XB2. Note that the size of the pending icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in this suspended icon image matching effect C, one of the suspended icons changes to the same shape as the reduced specific image XB2.

[Holding icon image matching effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon image matching effect D. FIG.
In the pending icon image matching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a brick-like pattern and the letter "S" in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the third movable accessory presentation is executed. In this third movable accessory presentation, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is positioned inside the third movable accessory 18.例文帳に追加In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18 . Here, the integrated object (mark, design object) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also called a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking performance, the character CRA stores the specific mark in the character CRA so that the character CRA sucks the specific mark. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to its home position.
At the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a pending icon change effect is executed. In this pending icon change effect, the character CRA makes an action to push out the specific mark sucked up in the direction of the pending icon display area where the pending icon is displayed, so that one of the pending icons 9A is held in the same shape as the specific mark. Change (one of the look-ahead effects). Note that the size of the pending icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific mark is smaller than the specific mark.
That is, in this suspended icon image matching effect D, one of the suspended icons changes to the same shape as the reduced specific mark.

It should be noted that the pending icon image matching effects A to D may incorporate other effects (such as other pending icon image matching effects) into one effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon image matching effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the suspended icon image matching effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the suspended icon partly identical to the specific image is displayed in the suspended icon change effect. be done. According to this configuration, since the specific image and one of the pending icons are partly the same, the display of the specific image can increase the player's expectation for the change of the pending status, thereby improving the game. Interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the pending icon image matching effects B and C, the specific image XB2 is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the pending icon having the same form (shape) as the specific image XB2 is displayed in the pending icon change effect. According to this configuration, since the specific image XB2 and one of the pending icons have the same aspect (shape), the display of the specific image XB2 can further increase the player's expectation for the change of pending status. , can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the suspended icon image matching effects A to D, the suspended icon change effect is performed after the specific image display effect. According to this configuration, after the specific image is displayed, the pending icon change effect is performed. can improve the interest of

[Effect 4]
In the pending icon image matching effects A to D, the normal pending icon is displayed before the specific image is displayed, and after the specific image is displayed, the normal pending icon has at least a part of the specific image. A holding change effect that changes to is performed. According to this configuration, the display of the pending icon having at least a part of the specific image can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the pending icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is being displayed, the third accessory movement effect of moving the third movable accessory 18 is executed. According to this configuration, the display of the specific image XB2 can be highlighted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the pending icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is being displayed, the third role movement effect is executed to move the third movable role 18, and the specific image XB2 and the third movable role are displayed. 18 form one mark (specific mark). According to this configuration, the specific mark can be formed by the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory 18, so that the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon image matching effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon image matching effect of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the specific image and the hold icon have partially the same (or the same) shape, but the specific image and the hold icon have the same (or the same) form. ), for example, the specific image and the pending icon may have partially the same or the same contour shape, or partially the same or the same pattern and color.

[Modification 2]
In the above pending icon image matching effects C and D, the color of the pending icon changed into pending in the pending icon change effect may be different from or the same as the color of the specific mark.

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon image matching effects C and D, the third movable accessory 18 may be moved so as to temporarily hide the pending icon to hide the pending icon, and then the pending icon may change. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 may cover all or part of the reserved icon.

[Modification 4]
In the pending icon image matching effects C and D, the pending change in the pending icon change effect may be performed after the third movable accessory 18 returns from the expanded position to the home position.

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon image matching effects C and D, when the third movable accessory 18 moves to the end of the display screen 7a, an image moving from the end toward the pending icon is displayed. The pending change may be performed when the pending icon is reached. In this case, when the image reaches the hold icon, a suggestion image is displayed to suggest that it has reached. This end may be located opposite where the pending icon is displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a hold icon of the first mode,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined image larger than the hold icon of the first aspect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the reserved icon in the first mode of the first display effect and the predetermined image in the second display effect are , partly in the same manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
The holding icon in the first mode of the first display effect and the predetermined image in the second display effect are in the same mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1 or aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a pending icon of a second mode different from the shape of the pending icon of the first mode,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second display effect, and in the first display effect, the pending icon in the second mode displayed in the third display effect. Instead of, the hold icon of the first aspect is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of moving the movable accessory in front of the display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XB-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-5,
In the combination effect, the predetermined image of the second display effect and the movable accessory of the fourth display effect form one mark.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable accessory impact presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. This movable role impact effect can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the movable character impact effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are transferred from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This movable accessory impact presentation is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation presentation). It should be noted that the movable accessory impact effect may be performed while the special symbols are changed a plurality of times (a plurality of change effects).

[Movable role object impact effect A]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect A. FIG.
In the movable accessory impact production A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the decorative pattern variation production is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a character movable effect is executed. In this movable accessory effect, the peripheral portion of the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper edge portion of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is positioned so as not to cover the display screen 7a as seen from the player. Therefore, it seems to the player that the peripheral portion of the second movable accessory 15 and the upper edge portion of the display screen 7a are adjacent to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is changed to hold while the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 85(C), the hold icon 9A changed to hold is indicated by cross hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable Accessory Impact Production B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect B. FIG.
In the movable accessory impact production B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a decorative pattern variation production is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a character movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where it partially covers the display screen 7a as seen from the player. In other words, it appears to the player that part of the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is changed to hold while the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 86(C), the hold icon 9A changed to hold is indicated by cross hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable Accessory Impact Production C]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect C. FIG.
In the movable accessory impact production C, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), the decorative pattern variation production is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a character movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable production, the second movable accessory 15 is produced to move to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where it partially covers the display screen 7a as seen from the player. In other words, it appears to the player that part of the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a screen shaking effect is executed. In this screen shake effect, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the display screen 7a, the impact causes the display screen 7a to shake. The character CRA (character display area) and the suspension icons 9A and 9C (suspension areas) are shown shaking (vibrating). Also, in this screen shaking effect, a predetermined effect sound (peep, etc.) is notified from the speaker 67 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is changed to hold by the screen shaking effect. In FIG. 87(D), the hold icon 9A changed to hold is indicated by cross hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.
Note that the screen shake effect and the pending change effect may be performed at the same time.

[Movable role object impact effect D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect D. FIG.
In the movable accessory impact effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a character movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable production, the second movable accessory 15 is produced to move to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where it partially covers the display screen 7a as seen from the player. In other words, it appears to the player that part of the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a lightning effect is executed. In this lightning effect, the lightning image XC1 is displayed by moving the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. The lightning image XC1 is an image representing a lightning extending from the second movable accessory 15 toward the pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a lightning reaching suggestion effect is executed. In this lightning reach suggesting effect, the lightning reach suggesting image XC2 is displayed by performing the lightning effect. The lightning strike suggesting image XC2 is displayed around the pending icon 9A reached by the lightning image XC1 from the second movable accessory 15 in the lightning effect, and indicates that the lightning has reached the pending icon 9A. This is a suggestive image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the hold icon 9A on which the arrival suggesting image XC2 is displayed undergoes a hold change. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

It should be noted that the movable accessory impact presentations A to D may incorporate other presentations (such as other movable accessory impact presentations) into one presentation.
In the movable role object impact effects A to D, the pending icons 9a, 9b, and 9c are displayed in the pending area arranged adjacent to the lower end opposite to the upper end on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable accessory impact presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the suspended icon in the first mode (the same mode as during the decorative symbol variation effect, normal mode) is displayed, the second movable One of the suspended icons is changed to a suspended icon in the second mode by the performance of moving the role product, in which the role product 15 is moved, and the performance of the movable performance of the role product. According to this configuration, since the role movement performance is performed when the hold is changed, the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win just by moving the movable role (the second movable role 15), and the game is played. can improve the interest of

[Effect 2]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the pending change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. moves to the end of the display screen 7a, the player can be made to expect a big win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the movable accessory impact effects B to D, the pending change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. 15) can make the player feel a sense of anticipation for a big win by simply moving to the front of the end of the display screen 7a, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the movable role object impact effects A to D, the pending icon is displayed in the pending area arranged adjacent to the lower end corresponding to the upper end on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon positioned at the lower end opposite to the upper end changes into a hold change, so that the performance as a whole has a sense of dynamism. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the movable accessory impact presentation C, the screen shake presentation is performed by performing the accessory movable presentation, and the pending change presentation is performed. According to this configuration, by moving the second movable accessory 15, the screen shake effect is performed by the impact, and the pending change effect is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the movable role object impact presentation C, a predetermined effect sound (peep, etc.) is notified from the speaker 67 in the screen shaking presentation. According to this configuration, when the screen shake effect is performed and the hold change effect is performed, the hold change effect can be emphasized with a predetermined sound effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the movable accessory impact effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the movable role impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second movable role 15 comes to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon changes to hold. Instead, the pending icon may be changed to pending simply by the movement of the second movable accessory 15 as a trigger. Also, when the second movable accessory 15 comes to the lower end, the left end, the right end, the center, etc., instead of the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon may change to hold.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a hold icon of the first mode,
The second display effect is a performance for performing a role object movement effect for moving a movable accessory,
The third display effect is a effect of changing the first state of the pending icon to the second state of the pending icon,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed. , the third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A position different from the front of the display means is a home position of the movable accessory,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is produced by performing the movable accessory effect of moving the movable accessory from the home position to the first end of the display means. is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is performed by moving the movable accessory from the home position to the front of the first end of the display means. Display production is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2 or aspect XC-3,
The pending icon is displayed in a pending area located adjacent to a second end opposite the first end of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, by performing the second display effect, a shaking effect is performed in which a predetermined display area including the reservation area in the display means shakes, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
In the combination effect, when the shaking effect is performed on the display means, a predetermined effect sound is notified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. This pending display effect is a effect that can be executed in relation to the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"), more specifically, the suspended display of the first special symbol. It is an effect that integrally displays the reserved display of the second special symbol and the second special symbol and displays it in a plurality of places.

[Holding display effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect A. FIG.
In the pending display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, in FIG. 89(A), the game state is the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
A pending number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. This pending number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the pending number by numbers are displayed close to each other on the left and right in the area. For example, the pending number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of reservations, are displayed close to each other in the vertical direction. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the pending display effect A, the pending numbers related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed in two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2, which indicate the number of reservations, are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In addition, in FIG. 89(A), H1 and K1 indicate "3", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3", and the reserved number of the second special symbol is " 0”. This is because it is difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 21 when the game state is the normal state. In the pending display effect A, the pending icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the pending icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the pending icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. Description and illustration in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a failure confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 89(A) is a loss. In this example, "758" is shown in this losing pattern array. In addition, in the loss determination effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "3", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0". ) is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special design. K1 decreases from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 89(C) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as the jackpot pattern arrangement. In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 89(C). It is the same as the design variation effect. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, winning to the second start port 21 has not occurred, so the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation production here (the first decorative pattern fluctuation production after the time-saving game is started) is the first special It is executed based on the number of pending symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the reserved numbers H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that there were three winnings to the second starting port 21 during the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending numbers H2, K2 related to the second special pattern increased from "0" to "3". and When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a to prompt the player to hit right-handed. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player is urged by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to hit the right, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (electric sapo), which makes it easier to win. can be made Also, during this period, almost no prizes are awarded to the first starting port 20 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 89(E) is a loss. In this example, "857" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement. In addition, in the lost fixed time reduction effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "1", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "3", which is shown in FIG. E) It is the same as the decorative pattern working time reduction effect shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the decorative symbol working time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design time-saving variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special design, and when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special design. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is given priority over the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol.

[Holding display effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect B. FIG.
In the pending display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, in FIG. 90(A), the game state is the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
A pending number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. This pending number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the pending number by numbers are displayed close to each other on the left and right in the area. For example, the pending number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of pending orders are displayed close to each other in the vertical direction. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the pending display effect B, the pending numbers related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed in two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2, which indicate the number of reservations, are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In addition, in FIG. 90(A), H1 and K1 indicate "2", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the reserved number of the first special symbol is "2", and the reserved number of the second special symbol is " 0”. This is because it is difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 21 when the game state is the normal state. In the pending display effect B, the pending icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the pending icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the pending icon (suspended digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. Description and illustration in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 90(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the character object first movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the reach performance shown in FIG. 90(B), the role object YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. It stops for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to cover it. In the state where the role YA is stopped at the first position, the reserved number display area HR is covered with the role YA, therefore, H1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol H2 indicating the number of reservations is invisible. On the other hand, when the role YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are not covered by the role YA. Therefore, by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is "2" and K2 is "0"), the player can see the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number related to the second special symbol. It is possible to grasp the number of reservations. Note that the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged so as to be able to move up and down behind the above-described board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1), and is positioned inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), the character object second movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character object second movable effect, after the character object YA stops for a predetermined time at the first position shown in FIG. 90(C), it further descends to the second position shown in FIG. It stops for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the state where the role YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are covered with the role YA. , K1 and K2 are not visible. On the other hand, when the role YA is stopped at the second position, the holding number display area HR is visible without being covered by the role YA. By visually recognizing "2", H2 is "0"), it is possible to grasp the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. When the character YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
In this way, even when the role object LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of reservations related to the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21 integrally displayed at multiple locations on the display screen 7a is The number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 displayed at any point can be visually recognized. In other words, all the pending numbers related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a are displayed even when the role object LYA as the movable body is moved. does not become invisible, and the pending numbers related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 displayed in at least one place are visible. Therefore, the player can always grasp the information of the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, and can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big win confirmation effect indicates that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 90(B) is a big win. Here, "777" is shown as the jackpot pattern arrangement. In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0". is similar to that shown in Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, winning to the second start port 21 has not occurred, so the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation production here (the first decorative pattern fluctuation production after the time-saving game is started) is the first special It is executed based on the number of pending symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the reserved numbers H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that there were three winnings to the second starting port 21 during the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending numbers H2, K2 related to the second special pattern increased from "0" to "3". and When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a to prompt the player to hit right-handed. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player is urged by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to hit the right, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (electric sapo), which makes it easier to win. can be made Also, during this period, almost no prizes are awarded to the first starting port 20 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 90(F) is a loss. In this example, "857" is shown in this losing pattern array. In addition, in the lost fixed time reduction effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "1", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "3", which is shown in FIG. It is the same as the decorative pattern time saving variation production shown in F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), the decorative symbol working time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design time-saving variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special design, and when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special design. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is given priority over the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol.

[Holding display effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect C. FIG.
In the pending display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 91(A) shows that the game state is a normal state (low probability/low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
A game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of pending numbers are displayed in the lower part of the area in close proximity to each other on the left and right. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR and directly above H1 and H2, a variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, thereby suggesting the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. F1 and F2 as four symbols are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the form of "o", and are displayed in different color schemes, for example, F1 is red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots). F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbols are changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbols are stopped (during symbol display) by lighting or extinguishing and stopping. For example, when both F1 and F2 are stopped in the lighting state, it suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the state in which both F1 and F2 are not lighting (either F1 or F2 is turned off, And, by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are turned off), it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of reservations by numerals, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed adjacent to each other in a column. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY consists of numbers from 0 to 9, and when the numbers 0 to 9 fluctuate, it indicates that the special design is changing, and when it stops at any number from 0 to 9, the special design Indicates that it is stopped (during symbol display). For example, if the DY stops at a number of 7, it suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and if the DY stops at a number other than 7, it suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a loss. .
That is, in the pending display effect C, the pending number and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at two locations, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, K1, K2 indicating the numbers of these pending, and F1, F2, and DY as the fourth symbols are always displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. be.
In addition, in FIG. 91 (A), H1 and K1 indicate "3", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "3", and the number of reserved second special symbols is " 0”. This is because it is difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 21 when the game state is the normal state. Also, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. In the pending display effect C, the pending icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the pending icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the pending icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. Description and illustration in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a failure confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 91(A) is a loss. In this example, "758" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement. In addition, in the loss determination effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "3", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0". ) is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in . In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are extinguished (the extinguished state of F1 is indicated by "●", and the extinguished state of F2 is indicated by "○"), and DY stops at 6 (numbers other than 7). It suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special design. K1 decreases from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0". In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 91(C) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 91(C). It is the same as the design variation effect. In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are lit (the lighting state of F1 is red (indicated by hatching), the lighting state of F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots), and DY stops at 7, thereby special symbols The result of the lottery is a big hit.In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the letters "Big Hit!" are displayed.This jackpot confirmation effect In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is the "16RV passage expected jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state remains high until the next big hit. It is a jackpot that becomes a certain time short state (high certainty high base state).

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, winning to the second start port 21 has not occurred, so the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation production here (the first decorative pattern fluctuation production after the time-saving game is started) is the first special It is executed based on the number of pending symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the reserved numbers H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that there were three winnings to the second starting port 21 during the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending numbers H2, K2 related to the second special pattern increased from "0" to "3". and Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a to prompt the player to hit right-handed. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player is urged by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to hit the right, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (electric sapo), which makes it easier to win. can be made Also, during this period, almost no prizes are awarded to the first starting port 20 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 91(E) is a loss. In this example, "857" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement. In addition, in the loss confirmation time saving effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "1", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "3", which is shown in FIG. E) It is the same as the decorative pattern working time reduction effect shown in FIG. In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are extinguished (the extinguished state of F1 is indicated by "●", and the extinguished state of F2 is indicated by "○"), and DY stops at 9 (a number other than 7). It suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), the decorative symbol working time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design time-saving variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special design, and when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special design. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is given priority over the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol. In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner.

[Holding display effect D]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect D. FIG.
In the pending display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, in FIG. 92(A), the game state is the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
A game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of pending numbers are displayed in the lower part of the area in close proximity to each other on the left and right. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR and directly above H1 and H2, a variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, thereby suggesting the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. F1 and F2 as four symbols are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the form of "o", and are displayed in different color schemes, for example, F1 is red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots). F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbols are changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbols are stopped (during symbol display) by lighting or extinguishing and stopping. For example, when both F1 and F2 are stopped in the lighting state, it suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the state in which both F1 and F2 are not lighting (either F1 or F2 is turned off, And, by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are turned off), it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2, which indicate the number of reservations by numerals, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed adjacent to each other in a column. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY consists of numbers from 0 to 9, and when the numbers 0 to 9 fluctuate, it indicates that the special design is changing, and when it stops at any number from 0 to 9, the special design Indicates that it is stopped (during symbol display). For example, if the DY stops at a number of 7, it suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and if the DY stops at a number other than 7, it suggests that the special symbol lottery result is a loss. .
That is, in the pending display effect C, the pending number and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at two locations, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, K1, K2 indicating the numbers of these pending, and F1, F2, and DY as the fourth symbols are always displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. be.
In addition, in FIG. 92(A), H1 and K1 indicate "2", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "2", and the number of reserved second special symbols is " 0”. This is because it is difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 21 when the game state is the normal state. Also, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. In the pending display effect C, the pending icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the pending icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the pending icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. Description and illustration in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern array in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 92(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. In addition, in this reach production, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are shown in FIG. It is the same as the decorative pattern variation production shown in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the character object first movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the reach performance shown in FIG. 92(B), the role object YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. It stops for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to cover it. When the role product YA is stopped at the first position, the game information display area YR is covered with the role product YA. H2 indicating the number of reservations and F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are invisible. On the other hand, when the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are , is visible without being covered by the character YA. Therefore, by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is "2" and K2 is "0"), the player can grasp the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. By visually recognizing DY (DY is "↓") as the fourth symbol, it is possible to grasp that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged so as to be able to move up and down behind the above-described board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1), and is positioned inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided so as not to be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the character object second movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character object second movable effect, after the character object YA stops for a predetermined time at the first position shown in FIG. 92(C), it further descends to the second position shown in FIG. It stops for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the state where the role YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are Object YA is covered, thus K1, K2 and DY are not visible. On the other hand, when the role YA is stopped at the second position, the game information display area YR is visible without being covered by the role YA. By visually recognizing "2", H2 is "0"), it is possible to grasp the number of reservations related to the first special design and the number of reservations related to the second special design, F1, F2 (F1 , F2 are in a flashing state), it is possible to grasp that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed. When the character YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
In this way, even when the role object LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of pending and As for the fourth pattern, the number of reservations and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, which are displayed at any point, can be visually recognized. In other words, the pending number and the fourth pattern related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a, are obtained when the character LYA as a movable body is moved. Even if there is, all of them are not invisible, and the number of reservations and the fourth pattern related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 displayed at least one place are visible. there is Therefore, the player can always grasp the information of the number of reservations and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21, and can face the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big win confirmation effect indicates that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 92(B) is a big win. Here, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate "0". is similar to that shown in On the other hand, both F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are stopped in the lighting state (F1 is red (indicated by hatching), F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots)), and DY as the fourth pattern is 7. Stopping, thereby suggesting that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit.

Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, winning to the second start port 21 has not occurred, so the decorative pattern time-saving fluctuation production here (the first decorative pattern fluctuation production after the time-saving game is started) is the first special It is executed based on the number of pending symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the reserved numbers H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that there were three winnings to the second starting port 21 during the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending numbers H2, K2 related to the second special pattern increased from "0" to "3". and Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a to prompt the player to hit right-handed. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player is urged by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR to hit the right, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (electric sapo), which makes it easier to win. can be made Also, during this period, almost no prizes are awarded to the first starting port 20 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 92(F) is a loss. In this example, "857" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement. In addition, in the lost fixed time reduction effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "1", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "3", which is shown in FIG. It is the same as the decorative pattern time saving variation production shown in F). In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are extinguished (the extinguished state of F1 is indicated by "●", and the extinguished state of F2 is indicated by "○"), and DY stops at 9 (a number other than 7). It suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the decorative symbol working time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative design time saving variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special design, and when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special design. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". In addition, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is given priority over the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a variable state (indicated by ↓), suggesting that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations related to the first start opening and the second start opening is displayed separately from the reservation icons related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , and numbers are continuously and integrally displayed on the display screen. According to this configuration, the number of reservations related to the first start opening and the second start opening is always continuously displayed on the display screen compared to the reservation icon that may be erased due to a predetermined effect or the like. At any time, the player can check the pending numbers associated with the current first and second openings. Moreover, since the number of reservations related to the first start opening and the number of reservations related to the second start opening are collectively displayed as numbers, the player can see the reservation display related to the first start opening and the reservation display related to the second start opening. It is possible to check the number of pending items at a glance and grasp the contents without searching for them. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, by performing variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, apart from the decorative symbols, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display is a big hit. The fourth pattern suggesting the result is always continuously displayed on the display screen integrally with the number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port. According to this configuration, the fourth pattern is always continuously displayed on the display screen as compared with the decorative pattern which may be erased due to a predetermined effect or the like, so that the player can view the current special pattern at any time. It is possible to confirm the display state, that is, whether the special symbols are fluctuating or stopped, and whether the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win or a loss. Moreover, since the fourth symbol is displayed integrally with the number of reservations related to the first start opening and the second start opening, the player can display the reservation display related to the first start opening and the second start opening. It is possible to check the number of reservations and the fourth pattern at a glance and grasp the content without the trouble of searching for the display of the reserved display and the fourth pattern. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port are integrally displayed on the display screen. In addition to being displayed, it is configured to be displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen. According to this configuration, the fourth pattern displayed integrally, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port are further displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen. Therefore, the player can very easily find the pending display related to the first starting port, the pending display related to the second starting port, and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the fourth symbol integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port Even if the movable body is moved, the number of reservations is the fourth symbol displayed anywhere on the display screen, the number of reservations related to the first start opening, and the number of reservations related to the second start opening. is configured to be visible. In other words, even if the movable body is moved, the number of reservations and the fourth pattern related to the first start port and the second start port, which are integrally displayed at multiple locations on the display screen, are all invisible. The pending numbers and fourth symbols associated with the first and second start ports displayed in at least one location are visible. According to this configuration, the player can always grasp the display of the number of reservations and the fourth symbol related to the first start port and the second start port, and can face the game with peace of mind. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port are displayed diagonally on the display screen. configured to display. According to this configuration, the movable range of the movable body is designed so that the display of the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port can be visually recognized at any time. becomes easier. That is, restrictions on the movable range of the movable body are relaxed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port are displayed at the same position on the display screen. It is configured to be displayed without moving. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first start port, and the number of reservations related to the second start port are always displayed at the same place on the display screen, so that the player can You can easily find these displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations related to the first special design, the number of reservations related to the second special design, and the fourth design are the upper left and lower right of the display screen. Although they are displayed diagonally, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reservations related to the first special design, the number of reservations related to the second special design, and the fourth design are the upper right and lower left of the display screen, the upper middle and lower middle, the left middle and right middle, the upper left and upper right, and the lower left. It may be displayed on the lower right or the like. That is, when the number of reservations related to the first special symbol displayed integrally, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen, at least the left end and right end of the display screen, Alternatively, the display may include the upper end and the lower end.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed at the lower right of the display screen are Like the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen, they may be displayed within a predetermined display area. In addition, the number of reservations related to the first special design, the number of reservations related to the second special design, and the arrangement of the fourth design are arbitrary, and if they are displayed integrally, what kind of display mode is good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations related to the first special design in the area, the number of reservations related to the second special design, the number of reservations display area for displaying the fourth design and game information display areas are displayed in predetermined colors, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pending number display area and the game information display area may change colors depending on the game state. For example, when the game state is normal state, it is white, when it is a low-probability short-time state, it is blue, when it is a high-probability short-time state, it is green, and when it is a latent state, it is red. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth pattern displayed in the game information display area is displayed as a plurality of graphics ("○") with different colors. is flashed or stopped to indicate that the special pattern is changing or stopped (during pattern display, lottery result display), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is added with symbols (numbers and letters), and the symbols are displayed together with the symbol in a predetermined manner to suggest that the special symbols are changing or stopped. good too. For example, when the fourth pattern is displayed with figures and numbers, this number is synchronized with another fourth pattern (DY) displayed with numbers at the bottom right of the display screen, and the same display mode is displayed. may be displayed with . By doing so, the player can easily understand the relationship between the fourth symbol and the special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed in plurality on the same display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display screens are provided in the game area, and the number of reservations related to the first special design, the number of reservations related to the second special design, and the fourth design are displayed one by one (one set) on those display screens. You may make it Alternatively, in addition to the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), a 7-segment display is provided in the game area, and the number of reservations related to the first special design, the number of reservations related to the second special design, and the fourth design are displayed. The information may be displayed on a screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and a 7-segment display. Alternatively, apart from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), LEDs and lamp indicators are provided at predetermined positions in the game area, and the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, the fourth The pattern may be displayed on a display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and LEDs or lamp indicators.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
a first start port and a second start port;
display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays on a predetermined display screen;
A gaming machine comprising
one of the plurality of representations is a first representation;
The first display is a display of the number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port,
The display means integrally displays the number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
A special symbol display means for displaying a lottery result as to whether or not a win is obtained by variably displaying a special symbol based on the winning in the first start port or the second start port,
one of the plurality of representations is a second representation;
The second display is a display of a fourth symbol suggesting the result of the lottery by variably displaying in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol,
The display means displays the fourth pattern integrally with the number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-3]
The display means displays the first display and the second display at a plurality of locations on the display screen,
displaying the first display and the second display within a predetermined display area in at least one of the plurality of locations;
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-4]
The display screen is formed in a substantially rectangular shape,
The plurality of locations on the display screen where the first display and the second display are displayed include at least the left end and right end or the top end and bottom end of the display screen.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-5]
a movable body; and
a control means for controlling the movement of the movable body in a predetermined manner;
with
The first display and the second display displayed at the plurality of locations are the first display displayed at any location even when the movable body is moved by the control means. and said second indication is visible,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4, characterized by:

The zone effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. This zone effect can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the zone effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This zone production is performed during one variation of the special symbols (one variation production). In addition, the zone production may be performed during plural fluctuations of the special symbols (plural fluctuation productions).

[Zone production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining zone effect A. FIG.
In the zone effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestive image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, a first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggesting image XD2 is an image suggesting the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "first zone" suggesting the first zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The first zone suggesting image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right. do. It should be noted that the character "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. This second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the second zone has been entered. In addition, in this second zone entry suggesting effect, the display of the first zone suggesting image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, a second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggesting image XD4 is an image suggesting the second zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "second zone" suggesting the second zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestive images XD4 are arranged to extend vertically on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as not to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. move to It should be noted that the characters "second zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining zone effect B. FIG.
In the zone effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestive image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, a first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggesting image XD2 is an image suggesting that it is the first zone, and more specifically, it is an image in which characters "first zone" suggesting the first zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The first zone suggesting image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right. do. It should be noted that the characters "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. This second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the second zone has been entered. In addition, in this second zone entry suggestive effect, the display of the first zone suggestive image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, a second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggesting image XD4 is an image suggesting the second zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "second zone" suggesting the second zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The second zone suggesting image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. move to It should be noted that the characters "second zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When this second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect C. FIG.
In the zone effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestive image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, a first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggesting image XD2 is an image suggesting the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "first zone" suggesting the first zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The first zone suggesting image XD2 is arranged so as to extend horizontally in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right. do. It should be noted that the character "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When this first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. This second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the second zone has been entered. In addition, in this second zone entry suggestive effect, the display of the first zone suggestive image XD2 is continued.
In addition, in this second zone entry suggestion effect, a role object movable effect is performed in which the third movable accessory 18 moves to the unfolded position. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 is arranged on the second zone entry suggestive image XD3, and the second zone entry suggestive image XD3 and the decorative pattern 8L are displayed within the frame of the third movable accessory 18 as seen from the player. , 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 and the character CRA are displayed. This second zone suggesting image XD4 is an image suggesting the second zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "second zone" suggesting the second zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestive images XD4 are arranged to extend vertically on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. move to It should be noted that the characters "second zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.

Also, in this second zone effect, the third movable accessory 18 is continuously arranged at the unfolded position. The character CRA is displayed within the frame of the third movable accessory 18 . Therefore, from the player's point of view, the variation effects of the character CRA and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R within the frame of the third movable accessory 18 can be visually recognized.
When this second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone production D]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect D. FIG.
In the zone effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestive image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, a first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggesting image XD2 is an image suggesting the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "first zone" suggesting the first zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The first zone suggesting image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestive image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right. do. It should be noted that the character "first zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestive images XD2.
When the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer display XD5 is displayed. This timer display XD5 is displayed between the upper first zone suggestive image XD2 and the lower first zone suggestive image XD2 and on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value changes according to the countdown. Represents a timer that In the example of FIG. 96(D), the initial value of the timer display XD5 is 15 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value (for example, zero). This second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variable areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and suggests that the second zone has been entered. In addition, in this second zone entry suggestive effect, the display of the first zone suggestive image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, a second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggesting image XD4 is an image suggesting the second zone, and more specifically, an image in which characters "second zone" suggesting the second zone are shown in a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestive images XD4 are arranged to extend vertically on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestive image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggestive image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestive image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestive image XD2. In the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the left, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggestive image XD4 on the right, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. move to It should be noted that the characters "second zone" may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestive images XD4.
When this second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestive image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

Note that the above zone effects A to D may be combined with other effects (such as other zone effects) to form one effect.
Further, in the zone effects A to D, the first zone suggesting image XD2 is displayed during the second zone entry suggesting effect and also during the second zone effect. Therefore, during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect, it is naturally the first zone effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of zone production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the second zone effects of the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first zone effects are also performed. That is, when the first zone effect is being performed, the second zone effect is also performed. According to this configuration, two zone effects are displayed at the same time, so that the player can have a great sense of anticipation for future developments, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the zone effects A to D, in the second zone effect, when the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed. According to this configuration, two zone-indicating images are displayed at the same time, so that the player can have a great sense of anticipation for future developments, and can improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the zone effects A to D, after the first zone entry suggesting effect in which the first zone entry suggesting image XD1 is displayed, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed. According to this configuration, after the first zone entry suggestive image XD1 is displayed, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed, so that the player can see the first zone entry suggestive image XD1 being displayed. At this point, the player can expect to develop into the second zone performance, and as a result, the expectation for the big win can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the zone effects A to D, the second zone effect is performed after the second zone entry suggestive effect in which the second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is displayed. According to this configuration, after the second zone entry suggesting image XD3 is displayed, the second zone effect is performed. Since it is confirmed that the game will develop into the second zone effect, as a result, the second zone entry suggestive image XD3 increases the expectation for the big win and enhances the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone suggesting image XD2 of the first zone effect is displayed, the second zone entering suggesting effect is performed in which the second zone entering suggesting image XD3 is displayed. According to this configuration, when the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed GW, the second zone entry suggestive image XD3 is displayed. It is possible to recognize that it will be implemented with a lot of expectations for future development. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone effect is being performed, a timer display effect that displays the timer display XD5 is performed. , zero), a second zone effect (second zone entry suggesting effect) is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value while the first zone suggestive image XD2 is displayed, the second zone effect in which the second zone suggestive image XD4 is displayed can be entered. When the timer display XD5 is displayed, the player greatly expects the entry into the second zone performance in addition to the first zone performance, and can have great expectations for the future development. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the zone production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the zone productions A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the first zone production and the second zone production are produced with the same variation. It may be performed across fluctuations (plural fluctuations of special symbols). For example, in the zone production D, a first zone entry suggestion production, a first zone production, and a timer display production are performed at a predetermined fluctuation, and a second zone entry suggestion production and a second zone production are carried out at the next fluctuation. may

[Modification 2]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed. A timer display effect may be performed before the suggestive effect, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first zone entry suggestive effect and the first zone effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone entry suggestion effect is started, and then the second zone effect is performed. When the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the display effect, the second zone effect may be performed without performing the second zone entry suggesting effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing a first zone effect,
The second display effect is a effect for performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, a first zone display representing the first zone effect is performed in the first display effect, and a second zone display representing the second zone effect is performed in the second display effect. is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1 or aspect XD-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a first zone entry suggesting display suggesting entry into the first zone effect,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a second zone entry suggesting display that suggests entering the second zone effect,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XD-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects XD-1 to Aspects XD-5,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying a timer,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value in the fifth display effect. , the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The cut-in effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. This cut-in effect can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the cut-in effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This cut-in effect is performed during one variation of the special symbols (one variation effect). In addition, the cut-in effect may be performed during a plurality of variations of the special symbols (a plurality of variation effects).

[Cut-in production A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect A. FIG.
In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols of the same number, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. This first cut-in display XE1 has a band-like and rectangular shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the left side. In FIG. 97(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. This first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. This second cut-in display XE2 has a band-like and rectangular shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the upper side. In FIG. 97(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1. Also, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band-like and rectangular shape, appears diagonally from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 97(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Also, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Also, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in production B]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining cut-in effect B. FIG.
In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols of the same number, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen toward the left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the bottom toward the left side. In FIG. 98(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. This first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen upward. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the tail end toward the upper side. In FIG. 98D, the second cut-in display XE2 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1. Also, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, and appears obliquely from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and spreads out toward the obliquely lower left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear diagonally from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed diagonally toward the lower left side. In FIG. 98E, the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Also, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Also, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in production C]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect C. FIG.
In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols of the same number, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen toward the left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the bottom toward the left side. In FIG. 99(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. This first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen upward. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the slant toward the upper side. In FIG. 99(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1. In addition, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2 is arranged behind the second cut-in display XE2. be. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, and appears obliquely from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and spreads out toward the obliquely lower left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear diagonally from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed diagonally toward the lower left side. In FIG. 99E, the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In addition, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the portion intersecting with the third cut-in display XE3 is the third cut-in display. It is arranged on the far side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. Also, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in production D]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect D. FIG.
In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display frequency suggesting effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win state is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols of the same number, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen toward the left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the bottom toward the left side. In FIG. 100(C), the first cut-in display XE1 is hatched. A character CRA is displayed on the first cut-in display XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to widen upward. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the tail end toward the upper side. In FIG. 100(D), the second cut-in display XE2 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1. In addition, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2 is arranged behind the second cut-in display XE2. be. A character CRB is displayed in the second cut-in display XE2. The character CRA displayed in the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed, but is not limited to this and may be displayed. A second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like and isosceles trapezoidal shape, appears diagonally from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed to spread diagonally toward the lower left side. In addition, it is not limited to this, and may appear diagonally from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed diagonally toward the lower left side. In FIG. 100(E), the third cut-in display XE3 is hatched differently from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In addition, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in display XE3 is intersected with the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the far side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. Also, the character CRC is displayed in the third cut-in display XE3. The character CRA and the character CRB displayed in the second cut-in display XE2 and the third cut-in display XE3 are not displayed, but are not limited to this and may be displayed. A third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the pending icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

Note that the cut-in effects A to D may be combined with other effects (such as other cut-in effects) to form one effect.
Further, after the cut-in effects A to D, a predetermined effect such as a super ready-to-win effect is performed. good too.
The first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 in the cut-in effects A to D function as a chance-up effect, and the more cut-in displays, the higher the expectation of a big win. It suggests.
In the cut-in effects A to D, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the same. However, the size of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be different. For example, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be as follows: first cut-in display XE1>second cut-in display XE2>third cut-in display XE3. Alternatively, the first cut-in display XE1<the second cut-in display XE2<the third cut-in display XE3.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the cut-in effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect. be done. According to this configuration, two cut-in effects are performed in order, so that the player can enjoy the continuous cut-in effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the bottom to the top in the second cut-in effect. Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the continuous cut-in effect is executed toward different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE1 is displayed from bottom to top in the second cut-in effect. Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the continuous cut-in effect is executed from different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect, and then the third cut. In the in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. According to this configuration, three cut-in effects are performed in order, so that the player can enjoy three continuous cut-in effects, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE1 is displayed from bottom to top in the second cut-in effect. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed diagonally from the upper right side to the lower left side. According to this configuration, since the continuous cut-in effect is executed toward three different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE1 is displayed from bottom to top in the second cut-in effect. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed diagonally from the upper right side to the lower left side. According to this configuration, since the continuous cut-in effect is executed from three different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the cut-in effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the game machine of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the cut-in display start position and end position, respectively. The positions are different, but not limited to this, the start position of the cut-in display may be the same and the end position may be different, or the start position of the cut-in display may be different and the end position is the same. Alternatively, the cut-in display start position and end position may be the same.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect for performing a first cut-in display,
The second display effect is a effect for performing a second cut-in display,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the combination effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward the first position in the first display effect, and the second display effect different from the first position is performed in the second display effect. The second cut-in display is performed toward the position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effect, the first cut-in display is performed from the third position toward the first position in the first display effect, and the third position is displayed in the second display effect. The second cut-in display is performed toward the second position from a fourth position different from
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a third cut-in display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward a fifth position different from the first position and the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XE-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the third cut-in display is performed from a sixth position different from the third position and the fourth position toward the fifth position. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

101 to 104, the decorative symbol variation display effects will be described below. This decorative design variation display effect relates to the variable display of decorative designs having definite variable designs and non-probable variable designs synchronized with the variation of the first special design or the second special design (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special design"). can be performed. More specifically, this decorative pattern variable display effect is a effect that is executed in relation to the variable display of decorative patterns integrally displayed with characters or non-characters.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 101(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol variation stop effect. This decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 101(A) has stopped. "689"). In this example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, odd numbers are probability variable patterns, and even numbers are normal patterns. That is, the jackpot pattern arrays "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are probability variable jackpots ("777" is "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", "333" is "16R (real 15R) V Expected passage jackpot”, “111”, “555”, “999” are “16R (real 13R) V expected passage jackpot”), jackpot pattern arrays “222”, “444”, “666”, “888” are normal It is a big hit (“16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot”).
In this decorative design fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design consists of a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable probability pattern is displayed as a pattern in which a red (indicated by hatching) number part SR as a symbol and a non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. The normal symbol number part SB and the variable probability symbol number part SR are displayed in substantially the same size. In addition, in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 101(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they are swayed up and down two or three frames), and are determined symbols. It does not represent the results of variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol confirmation effect. In this decorative symbol confirmation production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop production shown in FIG. It is a production to notify to. In this decorative design determination effect, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative pattern confirmation effect is performed. do. At this time, the size of the number portion SR is reduced and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in approximately half the size of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. In addition, the character part CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative pattern variation start effect is a effect performed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, which have been completely stopped in the decorative pattern confirmation effect shown in FIG. 101(C), start to fluctuate. In this decorative design variation start production, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative design confirmation production shown in FIG. is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative pattern variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the size of the number part SR is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC in substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal pattern. That is, when the decorative design fluctuation start effect is performed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the display mode of the decorative design finalization effect shown in FIG. 101(C) to the decorative design fluctuation stop shown in FIG. It returns to the display mode of production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the decorative design variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special design variation display. This decorative symbol variation effect is performed in the same manner as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 101(A) described above. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, when the pattern array including the probability variation pattern is confirmed and displayed, the probability variation pattern is integrally displayed with the number part SR and the non-character part NC. After the pattern is changed to a new pattern, and after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to approximately the same size as the number portion SB, the variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display mode of the probability variable symbols changes to the display mode of the temporary stop state.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect B. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 102(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 102(A). In this example, "9↓9" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. As described above, "9" is a variable probability symbol, that is, in this ready-to-win effect, a variable probability big hit is shown in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Thus, in this ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the ready-to-win pattern array consist of a red (hatched) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame. is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SR is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. It should be noted that the decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is fluctuating (scrolling downward). Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a ready-to-win symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win pattern change production, the display mode of the probability variable patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R) that has been stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement ("9↓9") is changed. That is, the variable probability symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when reaching reach. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed within the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. It should be noted that the decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is fluctuating (scrolling downward). Also, the character part CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol variation stop effect. This decorative design fluctuation stop effect is performed by stopping the medium decorative design 8C of the final stop design in the state where the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R shown in FIG. , the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped changing display. In this example, the middle decorative pattern 8C has stopped at the probability variable pattern "7", and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have stopped at the losing pattern arrangement ("979", reach losing pattern arrangement). Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at a pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that have stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement When the decorative pattern 8C stops, its display mode changes from a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, and The portion SR is enlarged in size and returns to the size at the time of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 102(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 102(D), when all the decorative patterns stop changing, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are patterns in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. The number part SR is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal pattern. 102(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they are oscillated up and down two or three frames). It does not represent the results of variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol confirmation effect. In this decorative design finalization effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the decorative design fluctuation stop performance shown in FIG. It is a production to notify. In this decorative design finalization effect, the display mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 102(D) is changed. Since all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol variation stop effect are variable probability symbols, the display mode of all the decorative symbols is changed in the decorative symbol determination effect. That is, when the decorative pattern confirmation effect is performed, the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is displayed in the decorative pattern 8L, 8R with the number part SR and the character part CA9. The decorative pattern 8C changes to a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed in the display areas of the character portions CA7 and CA9 in approximately half the size of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. In addition, the character part CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative pattern variation start effect is a effect performed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R which have been completely stopped in the decorative pattern confirmation effect shown in FIG. 102(E) start to change. In this decorative design variation start effect, the display mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed in the decorative design finalization effect shown in FIG. 102(E) is changed. Since all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fixed and stopped in the decorative design finalization performance are probability variable patterns, the display modes of all the decorative designs are changed in the decorative design variation start performance. That is, the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the character parts CA7 and CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to the display mode in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative pattern variation start effect is performed. change in pattern. At this time, the size of the number part SR is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC in substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal pattern. That is, when the decorative design fluctuation start effect is performed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the display mode of the decorative design finalization effect shown in FIG. 102(E) to the decorative design fluctuation stop shown in FIG. It returns to the display mode of production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. This decorative symbol variation effect is similar to the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 102(A) described above. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, when the pattern array including the probability variation pattern is confirmed and displayed, the probability variation pattern is displayed integrally with the number part SR and the non-character part NC. After the pattern is changed to a new pattern, and after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to approximately the same size as the number portion SB, the variation is started. That is, just before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display mode of the probability variable symbols changes to the display mode of the temporary stop state.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect C. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 103(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol variation stop effect. This decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 103(A) has been stopped. "689"). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probability variation symbol.
In this decorative design fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design consists of a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable probability pattern is displayed as a pattern in which a red (indicated by hatching) number part SR as a symbol and a non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. The normal symbol number part SB and the variable probability symbol number part SR are displayed in substantially the same size. In addition, in the decorative design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103(B), the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they are rocked up and down two or three frames), and are determined as the final design. It does not represent the results of variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol confirmation effect. In this decorative symbol confirmation production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop production shown in FIG. It is a production to notify to. In this decorative design determination effect, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, when the decorative pattern confirmation effect is performed, the display mode of the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed. do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed within the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. In addition, the character part CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative design variation start effect is a performance performed when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been completely stopped in the decorative design determination performance shown in FIG. 103(C), start to vary. In this decorative design variation start production, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative design confirmation production shown in FIG. is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative pattern variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the size of the number part SR is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC in substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal pattern. That is, when the decorative design fluctuation start effect is performed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the display mode of the decorative design finalization effect shown in FIG. 103(C) to the decorative design fluctuation stop shown in FIG. It returns to the display mode of production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. This decorative design variation effect is similar to the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 103(A) described above. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, when the pattern array including the probability variation pattern is confirmed and displayed, the probability variation pattern is integrally displayed with the number part SR and the non-character part NC. After the pattern is changed to a new pattern, and after the number portion SR is enlarged and changed to approximately the same size as the number portion SB, the variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display mode of the probability variable symbols changes to the display mode of the temporary stop state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol enlargement stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 103(E) has stopped. It shows that 8C and 8R stopped at the losing pattern arrangement ("678"). This decorative design enlargement stop effect is similar to the decorative design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. The probability variation design is stopped in the decorative design 8C. Here, when the probability variation pattern stops at the middle decorative pattern 8C, compared to the case where the probability variation pattern stops at the right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. It is designed to be displayed larger than the number part SB. That is, when the final stop design (middle decorative design 8C) stops with a probability variation design, the first stop design (left decorative design 8L) and the second stop design (right decorative design 8R) stop with a probability variation design , and the numeric part SR are displayed large. In this case, the numeric part SR is displayed partially protruding from the display area of the non-character part NC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol confirmation effect. In this decorative symbol confirmation production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol enlargement stop production shown in FIG. It is a production to notify to. In this decorative design determination effect, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative design enlargement stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed when the decorative design confirmation effect is performed. do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA7 in a size approximately half of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. In addition, the character part CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "7".
[Decorative pattern variation display effect D]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect D. FIG.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 104(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the display screen 7a executes a decorative symbol variation stop effect. This decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104(A) has stopped. "689"). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probability variation symbol.
In this decorative design fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design consists of a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable probability pattern is displayed as a pattern in which a red (indicated by hatching) number part SR as a symbol and a non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR is displayed within the display area of the non-character portion NC. The normal symbol number part SB and the variable probability symbol number part SR are displayed in substantially the same size. In addition, in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they are swayed up and down two or three frames), and are determined as the determined symbols. It does not represent the results of variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a stop symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this stop symbol change effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, when the stop symbol change effect is performed, the display mode of the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to the pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed. do. At this time, the size of the number portion SR is reduced and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in approximately half the size of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. 104(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, in a state of swinging up and down by two or three frames), and the determined symbols are changed. It does not represent the results of Also, the character part CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the variable probability symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a pseudo continuous start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This pseudo-run start effect is an effect performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104(C) start a pseudo-run.
Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the variable display of the decorative symbols appears to continue for a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is a performance that can be executed at the start of the variation, during the ready-to-win performance, at the time of stopping the variation, and the like. For example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after starting the variation of the decorative symbols, the effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping all the decorative symbols, the effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols, the effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols, An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT), or an effect that executes a variable effect of decorative patterns along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". including. Note that the number of repeated effects is also called the number of pseudo-runs, and can be expressed as "pseudo-2" and "x2" for two times, and "pseudo-3" and "x3" for three times.
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. situation is shown. That is, when the simulated continuous start effect is performed, the display mode of the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed changes to the pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. do. At this time, the size of the number part SR is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC in substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal pattern. That is, when the pseudo continuous start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104(C) to the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. is returned to the display mode of .

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a pseudo continuous variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pseudo continuous variation effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A) is performed. In other words, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when starting the pseudo-continuous variation, when the symbol array including the probability variation symbols is stopped and displayed, the probability variation symbols are integrated with the number part SR and the non-character part NC. After changing to the displayed pattern, and after enlarging the number part SR and changing it to substantially the same size as the number part SB, the change is started again. That is, just before the start of re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probability variable symbols changes to the display mode of the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104(B). 104(A) to (E) in the decorative symbol variation display effect D, the display mode when the pseudo continuous effect is performed is similar to that shown in FIG. 101(A) in the decorative symbol variation display effect A The display mode is the same as the variation effect of decorative symbols that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, as shown in (E). As a result, even when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo-continuous effect that makes it appear to the player that the decorative pattern (special symbol) is actually displayed a plurality of times. can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. That is, in this example, the ready-to-win effect is executed after the number of pseudo-runs is performed twice. This ready-to-win effect shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the pseudo-continuous variable effect shown in FIG. 104(E). In this example, "9↓9" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. As described above, "9" is a probability variation pattern, that is, in this ready-to-win effect, a probability variation jackpot is shown in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It should be noted that the decorative pattern 8C indicates that it is fluctuating (scrolling downward). Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the display screen 7a executes a big hit symbol enlargement stop effect. This jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is achieved by stopping the middle decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol in the state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. , that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has stopped. In this example, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the probability variable pattern "9", and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the probability variable jack pattern array "999". Here, in this jackpot design expansion stop effect, when the decorative pattern 8C in the final stop pattern is stopped in the probability variation pattern and the probability variation jackpot pattern array is displayed, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the probability variation pattern. The number part SR is enlarged and displayed larger than the number part SB of the normal pattern. In other words, the number part SR of the probability variation design is enlarged and displayed larger than the number part SR of the probability variation design shown in FIGS. 104(B), (D), and (F). Also, in this case, the numeric part SR is displayed so as to partially protrude from the display area of the non-character part NC. In addition, in the jackpot symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging up and down two or three frames), and the determined symbol is the variation. It does not represent the results of

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the jackpot pattern enlargement stop effect shown in FIG. This is an effect for notifying the player of what has happened. In this jackpot finalization effect, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as probability variable patterns stopped in the jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect shown in FIG. That is, the probability variable pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is changed to a pattern in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed when the big win confirmation effect is performed. . At this time, the size of the number portion SR is reduced and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in approximately half the size of the number portion SB of the normal pattern. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a character saying "big hit!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation display production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, there are a first pattern group and a second pattern group for the decorative symbols. The privilege to be given to the player is more advantageous than when the decorative patterns of the second pattern group result in a big win, and the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are the first symbols and the characters are integrally displayed. The decoration pattern of the second pattern group is the second pattern in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, and one of the plurality of display effects is the decoration pattern of the first pattern group. The decoration pattern may be displayed in the third mode pattern in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the decoration patterns of the first pattern group, in which the privilege given to the player is advantageously set, are displayed in the third pattern instead of the first pattern at a predetermined timing. In addition, it is possible to give a change to the variable display of the decorative symbols and make the player feel a premonition of a big win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbols to the third mode symbols in relation to the start of fluctuation, and in relation to the stop of fluctuation. It is configured to change from the third mode pattern to the first mode pattern. Furthermore, the first symbol in the first mode pattern is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second mode pattern, and the first symbol in the third mode pattern is displayed the same or larger than the second symbol in the second mode pattern. It is configured to According to this configuration, the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are displayed in a manner similar to the decorative patterns of the second pattern group, in which symbols and non-characters are integrally displayed during fast-moving fluctuations, and The 1st symbol will also be displayed the same size or larger than the 2nd symbol. As a result, even when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are fluctuating, the player can easily visually recognize the movement of the first symbols that are of the highest interest and are directly linked to awarding of the privilege. On the other hand, while the fluctuation is stopped without movement, the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are different from the decorative patterns of the second pattern group in a display mode in which symbols and characters are integrally displayed, and the first symbols are also displayed in the same manner as the characters. It will be displayed smaller than 2 symbols. As a result, while the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stop fluctuating, the first symbol is displayed in a small size to bring the character close-up, and the player is most interested in the first symbol of the first symbol group, which is directly linked to awarding of a privilege. It is possible to carefully view and keep in mind the characters associated with . In other words, the player can grasp the first symbol only by looking at the character. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the decorative symbols stop fluctuating in the predetermined pattern array and the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are included, once, The decorative patterns of the first pattern group are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the third mode pattern, and next, when the decorative patterns are fixed in the stopped (temporarily stopped) pattern arrangement, the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are stopped (temporarily stopped). It is configured to change from the third mode pattern to the first mode pattern. After that, when starting to variate the decorative symbols of the fixed pattern array, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbols to the third mode symbols. According to this configuration, if the decorative symbols of the first pattern group are included when the decorative symbols stop fluctuating in the predetermined pattern array, the player can play the first pattern group in the predetermined pattern array in which the fluctuation has stopped. can be easily confirmed, and the character associated with the first symbol in the fixed predetermined pattern arrangement can be easily confirmed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stop in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement When the pattern of the first pattern is changed to the pattern of the third pattern, and thereafter the final stop pattern is stopped and the variation is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined pattern arrangement, the decorative pattern of the first pattern group is changed from the pattern of the third pattern to the pattern of the first pattern. Change to a mode pattern. Next, when the decorative symbols are determined in the stopped (temporarily stopped) pattern array, the decorative symbols in the first pattern group are changed from the third mode symbols to the first mode symbols, and then the determined pattern array is changed. When starting to vary the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbols to the third mode symbols. According to this configuration, when the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement, the decorative patterns of the first pattern group are displayed in the third mode patterns instead of the first mode patterns, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the jackpot expectation of the reach of the person. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, when the final stop symbol stops at the decorative symbols of the first symbol group, or when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group When the jackpot pattern array) is displayed, the decorative patterns of the first pattern group change (enlarge) in size of the first symbols and are displayed integrally with the non-characters (a part of the display area of the non-characters is displayed). It is configured to be displayed in the fourth mode pattern (displayed protruding). According to this configuration, when the final stop pattern and the jackpot pattern array (probable variable jackpot pattern array), which are of the highest interest directly related to awarding of benefits, are decorative patterns of the first pattern group, the size of the first symbol changes (enlarges ), this makes it possible to change the variable display of the decorative symbols and improve the player's sense of expectation. In addition, the player can easily check the decorative symbols of the first symbol group and grasp the variation result. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the pattern arrangement including the decorative symbols of the first pattern group is stopped and displayed when the pseudo-continuous variation is started, the decorative symbols are displayed in the first pattern group. After the decoration pattern of the first pattern group is changed to the third mode pattern and after the first symbol is enlarged, the re-fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the display mode when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed becomes the same display mode as the actual variation effect of the decorative pattern which is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. As a result, even when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo-continuous effect that makes it appear to the player that the decorative pattern (special pattern) is realistically displayed multiple times. can be executed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol variation display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols include a first stop symbol (left decorative symbol), a second stop symbol (right decorative symbol), and a final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol). In any of the above, when the variable-stopped pattern is a definite variable pattern, once it is stopped (temporarily stopped) as a pattern in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed, the pattern in which numbers and characters are integrally displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the final stop pattern (middle decorative pattern) may be changed to a pattern in which numbers and characters are integrally displayed. The final stop symbol (middle decoration symbol) is the symbol that the player is most interested in, for example, in the ready-to-win state.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, odd numbers are probability variable symbols, even numbers are normal symbols, and numbers as symbols are displayed in red for probability variable symbols and blue for normal symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbols may be characters other than numbers, marks, or images (icons) of objects or articles having a specific shape. In addition, in the probability variation pattern, the character displayed integrally with the number is displayed in the same size, but the probability variation pattern (for example, "3", "7") is advantageous in giving benefits to the player when a big hit is made. ), the display of the character may be larger than other probability variation patterns.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) stops at the probability variation symbol, the probability variation symbol changes in size (enlarges) and non-character (Partially protrudes from the display area of the non-character), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the size of the number of the probability variation pattern is changed (enlarged) when the privilege given to the player when the big hit stops at an advantageous probability variation pattern (for example, "3", "7") good. In this case, it may be only when the probability variation design is the final stop design (middle decoration design), or when the probability variation design is the first stop design (left decoration design) or the second stop design (right decoration design) may be Alternatively, when the final stop design (middle decorative design) stops at the probability variation design, the probability variation design is the first stop design (left decoration design) and the second stop that are stopped without changing the size of the number. You may make it reduce the figure of a design (right decorative design).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when a jackpot pattern array (probability variable jackpot pattern array) is displayed with probability variation patterns, the size of the numbers of the probability variation patterns is changed (enlarged). It was made to be displayed integrally with the non-character (partially displayed outside the display area of the non-character), but in this case, in the reach state before the jackpot pattern array (variable jackpot pattern array) is displayed, It is also possible to enlarge and display the numbers of the probability variable symbols that will be a big hit among the final stop symbols during variation. Alternatively, all the numbers of the variable probability symbols among the changing final stop symbols may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the numbers of all the final stop symbols may be displayed in an enlarged manner.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the pattern that has stopped fluctuating is a probability variable pattern, it is once stopped (temporarily stopped) as a pattern in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed. Later, it was changed to a pattern in which numbers and characters are displayed integrally. For example, the color of the character changes to red and the character's face changes to a smile), and subsequent changes (including re-changes such as pseudo-runs) may result in a reach or a big win. In other words, the character may be changed to a predetermined display mode to suggest reach or a big win.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, in the pseudo continuous effect, the numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed and the probability variable symbols temporarily stopped are temporarily displayed together with the numbers and the characters. The pattern changes to a pattern, and then returns to the pattern in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed, and is changed again (hereinafter also referred to as a first pseudo-continuous effect), but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability variation pattern temporarily stopped by integrally displaying the numbers and non-characters is changed again without changing to the pattern in which the numbers and the character part are integrally displayed (hereinafter referred to as the second (also referred to as a 2-pseudo continuous effect). In this case, when the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed, it becomes a reach or a big hit in the subsequent re-fluctuation, and when the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed, it becomes non-reach in the subsequent re-fluctuation. can be In other words, by performing the first pseudo-continuous effect, a reach or a big win may be suggested.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns in accordance with the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The decorative patterns include a first pattern group and a second pattern group,
When a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the first pattern group, the privilege given to the player is set more advantageous than when a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the second pattern group,
the decorative pattern of the first pattern group is a first mode pattern in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed;
the decorative pattern of the second pattern group is a second mode pattern in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed;
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first decorative pattern effect may display the decorative patterns of the first pattern group in a third mode pattern in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-2]
In the first decorative design effect, the decorative design of the first design group is changed from the first mode design to the third mode design in relation to the start of fluctuation, and from the third mode design in relation to the stop of fluctuation. Change to the first mode pattern,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D3-3]
The first symbol in the first mode design is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second mode design, and the first symbol in the third mode design is the same or larger than the second symbol in the second mode design. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D3-4]
display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns in accordance with the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The decorative patterns include a first pattern group and a second pattern group,
When a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the first pattern group, the privilege given to the player is set more advantageous than when a big win is achieved with the decorative patterns of the second pattern group,
the decorative pattern of the first pattern group is a first mode pattern in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed;
the decorative pattern of the second pattern group is a second mode pattern in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed;
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second decorative design effect may display the decorative design of the first design group in a fourth mode design in which the size of the first symbol is changed and displayed integrally with the non-character.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-5]
The decorative symbols of the first symbol group are probability variable symbols, the decorative symbols of the second symbol group are non-variable probability symbols, the first symbol and the second symbol are numbers, and the number of the first symbol the numbers of the second symbols are of different colors;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4, characterized by:

The game state suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. This game state suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed in connection with the end of the time-saving game performed after the jackpot game, and more specifically, when a predetermined condition is established after the time-saving game is completed, the game state is low probability. It is a production that suggests whether it is (normal state) or high probability (latent probability variable state).

[Game State Suggestion Effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect A. FIG.
In the game state suggesting effect A, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped last.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot pattern array "777" is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. ) is a big hit. The jackpot pattern array "333" is "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" (probability variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the next big hit. It is a big hit. Jackpot pattern arrays other than "777" and "333" become "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passing jackpot" (potential jackpot) or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot). is. "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" (potential jackpot) after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) until the number of special symbol fluctuations is performed 100 times. , After that, it will be in a high probability low base state (latent probability variable state). "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot), after the jackpot game ends, the game state will be in a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state) until the number of special symbol fluctuations is performed 100 times. , After that, it will be in a low probability low base state (normal state).
In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105(A), "555" is shown in the jackpot pattern array. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" (potential jackpot) or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" (normal jackpot ), and the jackpot pattern array “555” here is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (potential jackpot).

Next, after the big win determination effect is executed, the big win game is started, and although illustration is omitted, the effect related to this big win game is executed on the display screen 7a. Then, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time-saving start performance, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed in a high-probability/high-base state, but even if the player can recognize the time-saving state, it is difficult to recognize the high-probability state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. In addition, on the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time saving frequency display ZT indicating the remaining time saving frequency is displayed. Since this is the case (when the number of times of time saving has not been consumed even once), "100" is shown as the default value.

Next, after the time-saving start performance is executed, the time-saving game is started, and when the special symbols are changed 100 times in this time-saving game, that is, when the jackpot is not achieved during the period of this time-saving game. , As shown in FIG. 105(C), the time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time-saving end effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased from the display screen 7a, and instead, the characters "time-saving end" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" is displayed on the time-saving number display ZT. is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), on the display screen 7a, the time-saving ending variable effect is executed. In this time-saving end time variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, in a longer variation time than during the time-saving game. Further, on the display screen 7a, a specific image KSG1 with a "mountain" motif is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This specific image KSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once after the time-saving game is completed (after the time-saving end time variation effect is performed), as shown in FIG. is executed. Here, in the game state suggesting effect A, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is finished, the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (normal state) using the specific image KSG1. Latency probability change state) or latent probability change suggestion production to be described later. In the countdown production shown in FIG. 105 (E), since the special symbol variation display is performed once after the time-saving game is completed, it is indicated that the special symbol variation display is remaining 9 times until the latent probability variation suggestive effect. The number "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown production is switched to the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (losing pattern) every time the special pattern is displayed once after the time-saving game is finished, and the latent probability variation suggestion production is performed. A large number indicating the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen. Note that in this countdown effect, only the numbers indicating the countdown to the potential change suggesting effect are displayed, and the specific image KSG1 is once erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the display screen 7a executes a countdown variable effect. In this countdown time variable effect, the numbers are switched to those indicating the countdown to the latent probability variable suggestive effect shown in FIG. At this time, the specific image KSG1, which was temporarily erased in the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105(E), is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown production and the countdown fluctuation production are alternately repeated, and after the time-saving game is finished, the special symbol fluctuation display is performed 10 times, and then, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the display screen At 7a, a countdown effect is executed in which the number "0" is displayed to indicate that there are 0 remaining special symbol variations until the latent probability variation suggesting effect. In other words, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105(G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestive effect has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a latent probability variation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability variable suggestive effect, when the current game state is high probability (latent probability variable state), the color of the specific image KSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, from white to red), and low probability (normal state). In the case of , the color of the specific image KSG1 is not changed to produce an effect suggesting whether the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (variable latent probability state). In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 105(A), the jackpot pattern array "555" is internally set as a potential jackpot. ), the white specific image KSG1 shown in (F) is changed to the red specific image KSG2, suggesting that the current game state is high probability (variable latent probability state). If the jackpot pattern array "555" is internally set as a normal jackpot, the latent probability variation suggestive effect shown in FIG. KSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current game state is low probability (normal state).

[Playing State Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect B. FIG.
In the game state suggestion performance B, although illustration is omitted, a decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped last.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106(A), "555" is shown in the jackpot pattern array. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" (potential jackpot) or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" (normal jackpot ), and the jackpot pattern array “555” here is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (potential jackpot).

Next, after the big win determination effect is executed, the big win game is started, and although illustration is omitted, the effect related to this big win game is executed on the display screen 7a. Then, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time-saving start performance, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed in a high-probability/high-base state, but even if the player can recognize the time-saving state, it is difficult to recognize the high-probability state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. In addition, on the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time saving frequency display ZT indicating the remaining time saving frequency is displayed. Since this is the case (when the number of times of time saving has not been consumed even once), "100" is shown as the default value. In addition, the upper left portion of the display screen 7a shows that the mode A is the production mode to be performed from this time-saving start production. Mode A is an effect with a “mountain” motif, and in this time-saving start effect, a specific image imitating a “mountain” is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. KSG1 is displayed.

Next, after the time-saving start effect is executed, the time-saving game is started, and when the special symbol is changed 50 times in this time-saving game, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the display screen 7a changes the effect mode. A performance is performed. This production mode change production is a production that changes the production mode from mode A to mode B, and the production with the motif of "mountain" in mode A is changed to the production with the motif of "tree" in mode B. . That is, mode B is a production with a motif of "tree", which is performed when the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) after the time-saving game is started, and this production mode change production. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific image RSG1 imitating a "tree" is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R instead of the specific image KSG1. Note that this specific image RSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, when the special pattern changes 100 times in the time saving game (50 times the special pattern change from the production mode change effect), that is, if the jackpot does not occur during the time saving game period, the figure As shown in 106 (D), the time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time-saving end effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased from the display screen 7a, and instead, the characters "time-saving end" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" is displayed on the time-saving number display ZT. is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), on the display screen 7a, a time-saving ending variable effect is executed. In this time-saving end time variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, in a longer variation time than during the time-saving game. Note that the mode B is maintained as the effect mode, and a specific image RSG1 imitating a "tree" is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the same manner as during the time-saving game.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once after the time-saving game is completed (after the time-saving end time variation effect is performed), as shown in FIG. is executed. Here, in the game state suggesting effect B, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is finished, the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (normal state) using the specific image RSG1. Latency probability change state) or latent probability change suggestion production to be described later. In the countdown production shown in FIG. 106 (F), since the special symbol variation display is performed once after the time saving game is finished, it is indicated that the special symbol variation display is remaining 9 times until the latent probability variation suggestive effect. The number "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown production is switched to the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (losing pattern) every time the special pattern is displayed once after the time-saving game is finished, and the latent probability variation suggestion production is performed. A large number indicating the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen. Note that in this countdown effect, only the numbers indicating the countdown to the potential change suggesting effect are displayed, and the specific image RSG1 is once erased.

Next, although illustration is omitted here, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a countdown variable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time variation effect, the numbers are switched to those indicating the countdown to the latent probability variation suggestive effect shown in FIG. At this time, the specific image RSG1 that was temporarily erased in the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106(F) is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown production and the countdown fluctuation production are alternately repeated, and after the time-saving game is finished, the special symbol fluctuation display is performed 10 times, and then, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the display screen At 7a, a countdown effect is executed in which the number "0" is displayed to indicate that there are 0 remaining special symbol variations until the latent probability variation suggesting effect. In other words, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106(G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a latent probability variation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability variable suggestive effect, when the current game state is high probability (latent probability variable state), the color of the specific image RSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, from white to red), and low probability (normal state). In the case of , the color of the specific image RSG1 is not changed, so that an effect indicating whether the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (variable latent probability state) is performed. In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 106(A), the jackpot pattern array "555" is internally set as a potential jackpot. ), the white specific image RSG1 shown in (E) is changed to the red specific image RSG2, suggesting that the current game state is high probability (variable latent probability state). If the jackpot pattern array "555" is internally set as a normal jackpot, the latent probability variation suggestive effect shown in FIG. RSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state).

[Game State Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect C. FIG.
In the game state suggestion performance C, although illustration is omitted, a decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107(A), "555" is shown in the jackpot pattern array. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" (potential jackpot) or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" (normal jackpot ), and the jackpot pattern array “555” here is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (potential jackpot).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot game presentation, the characters "Jackpot game start!" is displayed. In the jackpot game production, production such as opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the selected image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This selection image display effect is performed during the execution of the big win game (for example, during the round effect), and is performed as one of the big win game effects. Display SG2, SG3 and SG4. The selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images including characters "CHANCE" in the display area, and the selected image SG1 is red, the selected image SG2 is green, the selected image SG1 is yellow, and the selected image SG1 is blue. is displayed in Here, the selection images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images suggesting the game state after the big win game, and more specifically, the degree of expectation that the game state after the big win game will be in a probability variable (high probability) state. This is a suggestive image. The degree of expectation is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG4 (blue) (for example, the game state after the big win game is The probability of being in the probability variable (high probability) state is selected image SG1: 80%, selected image SG2: 60%, selected image SG3: 40%>selected image SG4: 20%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this button effect, an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the selection images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 shown in FIG. 107(C) are temporarily erased, and the button image BOG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and "Button PUSH!" is displayed above the button image BOG. ” is displayed. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggesting effect is an effect in which any one of the selection images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 is displayed as a result of the player pressing the effect button 63 during the valid operation period of the effect button 63. Here, it is shown that the selected image SG1 (red) is selected and displayed based on the fact that it is internally a potential jackpot (internally it is a probability variable or a potential jackpot). SG1 (red)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG4 (blue). When the jackpot is won, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG4 (blue)>selected image SG3 (yellow)>selected image SG2 (green)>selected image SG1 (red)).

After that, the jackpot game ends, and although not shown, in the display screen 7a, in the same way as in FIGS. A time-varying effect and a countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), on the display screen 7a, the same latent probability variation suggestion effect as in FIG. 105(H) is executed. That is, the white specific image KSG1 is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is high probability (variable latent probability state). That is, in the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), when the selection image SG1 (red) with the highest degree of expectation that the game state after the jackpot game will be in a variable probability (high probability) state is selected, Like the latent probability variable suggesting effect shown in 107 (F), the probability of executing an effect suggesting that the current game state is high probability (latent probability variable state) is increased.

On the other hand, in the gaming state suggesting effect, it is assumed that the selection image SG4 (blue) is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 107(G) instead of FIG. It is assumed that the jackpot pattern array "555" was "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot)).

After that, the jackpot game ends, and although not shown, in the display screen 7a, in the same way as in FIGS. A time-varying effect and a countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), on the display screen 7a, the specific image KSG1 in white is not changed to the specific image KSG2 in red, and the specific image KSG1 is maintained in white. is executed. That is, the latent probability variation suggesting effect that suggests that the current game state is low probability (normal state) is executed. That is, in the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 107 (G), when the selection image SG4 (blue) with the lowest degree of expectation that the game state after the jackpot game will be in a variable probability (high probability) state is selected, Like the latent probability variation suggesting effect shown in 107 (H), the probability that the effect suggesting that the current game state is low probability (normal state) will be executed increases.

[Playing State Suggestion Effect D]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect D. FIG.
In the game state suggesting effect D, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped last.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 108(A), "555" is shown in the jackpot pattern array. Here, as described above, this jackpot pattern array "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passing jackpot" (potential jackpot) or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot ), and the jackpot pattern array “555” here is “16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot” (potential jackpot).

Next, a jackpot game is started, and although illustration is omitted, a jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a in the same manner as in FIG. 107(B). In this jackpot game production, productions such as an opening production, a round production, and an ending production are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a character selection effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character selection effect is performed during execution of the big win game (performed during the round effect, for example) and executed as one of the big win game effects, and a plurality of selected characters are displayed on the display screen 7a. . In this example, two selection characters CRA and CRB are displayed as selection characters. As shown in FIG. 108(B), as for the selection characters CRA and CRB, the selection character CRA is displayed in the left half display area of the screen, and the selection character CRB is displayed in the right half display area of the screen. In addition, above the selected characters CRA and CRB, characters suggesting how to operate the effect button 63 are displayed. The selected character CRA is displayed with the characters ``single hit'', and the selected character CRB is displayed with the characters ``continuous hits''. ing. Furthermore, characters indicating the names of the characters are displayed below the selected characters CRA and CRB, and the characters "OARO" are displayed for the selected character CRA, and the characters "JARO" are displayed for the selected character CRB. When the character selection effect is executed, the player operates the select button 68 to select either the selected character CRA or CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a character determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character determination effect, the character selected by the player in the character selection effect is displayed, and here, the selected character CRA is selected and displayed. That is, in the character determination effect, the selected character CRB that is not selected among the selected characters CRA and CRB displayed in the character selection effect is erased from the display screen 7a, and the selected selected character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed in the center. In addition to the selected character CRA, the characters "one blow" and "OARO" are also displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRA displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect causes the player to press the effect button 63 once due to the "hit" suggesting the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRA. Specifically, the button image BOG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the text "Button PUSH!" is displayed above the button image BOG. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the player's pressing operation of the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63, the game state suggesting effect is displayed with an image suggesting the game state after the jackpot game. More specifically, it is an image that suggests the degree of expectation that the game state after the jackpot game will be in the variable probability (high probability) state. In this example, the image suggesting the gaming state after the big winning game is an expectation suggesting image KSG1 displayed in red including the characters "CHANCE" in the display area. Here, the expectation suggestive images are the expectation suggestive image KSG2 displayed in green, the expectation suggestive image KSG3 displayed in yellow, and the expectation suggestive image displayed in blue. Four types of KSG4 are available. The magnitude of this expectation is in the order of expectation-suggestion image KSG1 (red)>expectation-suggestion image KSG2 (green)>expectation-suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)>expectation-suggestion image KSG4 (blue) (for example, , The probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a variable (high probability) state is: Expectation suggesting image KSG1: 80%, Expectation suggesting image KSG2: 60%, Expectation suggesting image KSG3: 40% > Expectation suggesting image KSG4: 20%). It should be noted that the reason why the expectation level suggesting image KSG1 (red) is selected in this gaming state suggesting effect is based on the fact that it is internally a potential jackpot. When there is, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of expectation suggestive image KSG1 (red)>expectation suggestive image KSG2 (green)>expectation suggestive image KSG3 (yellow)>expectation suggestive image KSG4 (blue). When the normal (low-probability) jackpot is achieved internally, the magnitude of the selection probability is: Expectation suggestive image KSG4 (blue)>Expectation suggestive image KSG3 (yellow)>Expectation suggestive image KSG2 (green)> order of the expectation-suggestion image KSG1 (red)).

On the other hand, in the character determination effect, it is assumed that the selected character CRB is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 108(F) instead of FIG. It is assumed that "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRB displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect causes the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63 due to the "rapid hit" suggesting the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRB. Specifically, a plurality of button images BOG and the characters "PUSH" superimposed on the button images BOG are repeatedly displayed on the display screen 7a while changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggesting effect is the same as that shown in FIG. 108(E), and as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, an image suggesting the game state after the big winning game is displayed. In this example, the image suggesting the gaming state after the big winning game is the expectation suggesting image KSG4 displayed in blue including the characters "CHANCE" in the display area. The reason why the expectation level suggesting image KSG4 (blue) is selected in this game state suggesting effect is based on the fact that the game is normally a big win internally.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the game state suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the time-saving game is a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability-high base state) and a high-probability-shortening state (high-probability-high base state) There is, when the time-saving game is over, in the low-probability short-time, the game state becomes a low-probability low-based normal state, and in the high-probability short-time, the game state is apparently a normal state and a probability change that is difficult to distinguish is latent. When a high-probability-low base latent probability variable state is entered, and a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is completed, a game state suggesting effect is performed that suggests whether the current game state is a normal state or a latent probability variable state. It's becoming According to this configuration, the player can determine whether the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (latent probability variable state) when the predetermined condition is established after the time saving game is completed. can. As a result, the player can face the game with great joy when the game state suggesting effect suggests a high probability (variable latent probability state). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the establishment of the predetermined condition is when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the time-saving game is finished. There is, after the end of the time-saving game, countdown display is performed for each variation of the special symbol until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. According to this configuration, the player can easily grasp how many times after the time-saving game is finished, the variable display of the special symbol is executed before the game state suggesting effect is performed. In addition, this countdown display (especially the countdown display immediately before the game state suggestive effect is performed) can give the player a feeling of excitement and excitement as to whether the probability is changed or not, and the player can give the game state suggestive effect. Missing can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a specific image that changes according to the effect mode is displayed. By changing the display mode of the specific image, it is configured to suggest whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variable state. According to this configuration, the player can very easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variable state simply by recognizing that the display mode of the specific image has changed. Further, since the specific image changes according to the performance mode, it is possible to perform a game state suggesting performance that matches (harmonizes with) the performance mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, during execution of the jackpot game, a plurality of selection images suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is displayed, and an image selected from among the plurality of selection images is displayed. The selected image is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the game state after the big winning game. According to this configuration, the player can predict the game state after the big winning game during the execution of the big winning game. In addition, when it is suggested that the game state after the jackpot game is high, the player can face the game with great joy. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 108, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with production buttons that can be operated by the player, displays a plurality of characters that can be selected by the player during execution of the jackpot game, and displays a plurality of characters among the plurality of characters. A button performance with different operation of the performance button is performed according to the character selected from , and the game state after the jackpot game is suggested after the button performance is finished. According to this configuration, the player can operate different effect buttons depending on the selected character. In addition, the player can select a character capable of operating his/her favorite effect button, and can look forward to the suggestion of the game state after the jackpot game that will be performed thereafter. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the game state suggesting effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the specific image is displayed after the end of the time saving game or after the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be continuously displayed in all gaming states. Also, the specific image is automatically changed according to the production mode, but the production mode may be selectable by the player so that the player can select his/her favorite specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the game state suggesting effect is that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times after the time-saving game is finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the establishment of a predetermined condition is when a predetermined time has elapsed since the time-saving game ended, or when a predetermined winning opening has been won (predetermined number of prizes) after the time-saving game has ended, or when the time-saving game has ended. After that, it may be when a predetermined effect (including reach) is performed, or when the variable display of symbols other than special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, after the time-saving game is completed, the countdown display is performed for each variation of the special symbol until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Although the game state suggestion effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display may be a countup display. Also, the countdown display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, the countdown display may be displayed so as to protrude from the display screen. By doing so, it is possible to perform a powerful countdown display, and to appeal to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the game state suggesting effect changes the color of the specific image to suggest whether the current game state is likely to change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state suggesting effect suggests whether or not the current game state is likely to change by changing the pattern of the specific image to a different pattern or by changing the specific image to a three-dimensional image (3D). may Alternatively, the color and size of the countdown display, that is, the display mode of the countdown display may indicate whether or not the current gaming state is likely to change. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific image is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, but the display position of the specific image may be arbitrary. may move. Further, the high certainty suggestion by the specific image may be continued until the next big hit, or may be continued until the subsequent special figure fluctuation frequency reaches a predetermined frequency.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the presentation mode is exemplified with motifs of "mountain" and "tree", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the production mode may have motifs of various characters. In this case, the specific image that changes according to the presentation mode may be displayed as a character image.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a plurality of selection images are displayed during execution of the jackpot game, and a selection image selected from among the plurality through button effects is used to display the game after the jackpot game. Although the state is suggested, in this case, a plurality of selection images may be sequentially lit and displayed, and the selection image lit at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63 may be selected. Alternatively, a plurality of selection images may be rotated and displayed, and the selection image at the selection position may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63 . By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to select the selection image desired by the player through technical intervention by the player himself/herself. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the expectation suggesting image displayed (selected) in the game state suggesting effect during the execution of the jackpot game is the internal jackpot type (the jackpot is likely to change). (whether or not), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree suggesting image indicates whether or not the player has operated the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction in the button effect that is performed immediately before the game state suggesting effect. The degree of achievement (hereinafter also referred to as "degree of achievement of button operation") may be determined. Alternatively, the expectation level suggesting image may be determined in consideration of the internal jackpot type and the player's button operation achievement degree in the button presentation. In this way, the player can technically intervene himself to display an expectation suggestive image with a higher degree of expectation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player selects either the selected character CRA or CRB in the character selection effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character selection effect, the character may be selected from three or more characters. Further, when a character is selected in a character selection effect, a predetermined line may be displayed or uttered, and the degree of expectation for a big win may be changed depending on the type of the displayed or uttered line.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the selected image display effect, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are displayed, but the number and display positions of the selected images are not particularly limited. It may be optional. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, in the button effect, five button images BOG are displayed, but the number of button images BOG is not particularly limited and may be arbitrary.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, when the jackpot game ends, the time saving game is started, and when the special symbol fluctuation (time saving number) is performed 100 times in this time saving game, the time saving game is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of times of time saving reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times, 50 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) of whether or not to increase the number of times of time saving by a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) may be performed. good. Alternatively, when the number of times of time saving reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) of whether or not to continue the number of times of time saving until the next big hit may be performed. Furthermore, when the number of times of time saving reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) of whether or not to suggest probability change determination may be performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
a jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when the symbols variably displayed by the pattern display means are jackpot patterns;
a time-saving game changing means for changing the game state after the big-hit game executed by the big-hit game execution means to a time-saving game;
A gaming machine comprising
In the time-saving game, the probability of winning the jackpot is a low-probability short-time that is a normal first probability and a high-probability short-time that is a second probability higher than the first probability,
When the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a normal state on a low-probability/low-probability base in the low-probability short-time, and in the high-probability short-time, the game state has a probability variation that is difficult to distinguish from the normal state apparently. It will be in a high-probability-low base latent probability variable state,
The display means is capable of executing a first effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays,
The first effect display performs a game state suggesting effect suggesting whether the current game state is a normal state or a latent probability variable state when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is finished.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E1-2]
satisfaction of the predetermined condition is when the symbol display means performs the variable display of the symbol a predetermined number of times;
The display means is capable of executing a second effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays,
In the second effect display, a countdown display is performed for each variation of the symbol until the variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time-saving game is completed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-3]
The display means is capable of executing a third effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays,
The third effect display is a effect display for displaying a specific image that changes according to the effect mode,
The game state suggestion effect suggests whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variable state by changing the display mode of the specific image depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the latent probability variable state. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-4]
The display means is capable of executing a fourth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays,
The fourth performance display is a performance display performed by the jackpot game execution means during execution of the jackpot game, wherein a plurality of selection images suggesting a game state after the jackpot game are displayed, and the plurality of selection images are displayed. Suggesting the degree of expectation of the game state after the jackpot game by the selected image selected from among
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-5]
Equipped with a production button that the player can operate,
The display means is capable of executing a fifth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays,
The fifth performance display is a performance display performed by the jackpot game executing means during the execution of the jackpot game, wherein a plurality of characters selectable by the player are displayed, and the character selected from the plurality of characters is displayed. Depending on the state, a button effect is performed in which the operation of the effect button is different, and after the button effect is completed, the game state after the big win game is suggested.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4, characterized by:

The meter effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. This meter effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the meter effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an effect that displays an image.

[Meter production A]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but when it is advanced to the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), , illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), in the meter effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a to perform a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display). During this variable effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. This meter image MT and the variable display become visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is held, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters fight a duel as in this embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result) can be used to notify whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect is displayed in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other.

In the battle effect, first, as a pre-stage effect, an enemy character determination effect for specifying the opponent of the ally character CRA is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 109(C), the still image TK of the opponent character and the still image MK of the ally character are displayed side by side. The meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, a battle start suggesting effect is executed. Here, a battle start suggesting image BKS labeled "Battle Start!!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(E), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the teammate character CRA is displayed alone, a meter image moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the teammate character CRA prepares to assume the posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. can give As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and during the battle effect. Also, it moves from the first position to the second position during the battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, 9), and when all are filled (when all 9 are changed in color), the friend character CRA wins the enemy character CRB. Victory or defeat is indicated by the success or failure of filling the meter to the full. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. A repeated-hit suggesting image is displayed, which is indicated as "Hit !!!". After that, when the meter is fully charged, the meter image MT is switched to a full tank image MXG representing "MAX!!!" as shown in FIG. 109(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(I), a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17 . After that, as shown in FIG. 109(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Meter effect B]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but when it is advanced to the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), , illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the meter effect B, a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variable effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. This meter image MT and the variable display become visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is held, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters fight a duel as in this embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result) can be used to notify whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect is displayed in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other.

In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 110(C), an advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed as a pre-stage effect. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display screen 7a continues to display the meter image MT at the first position, and also displays the button image BTN and the operation suggestion image SSE indicating "Press!!!". . At this time, an enemy character determination effect for specifying the opponent of the ally character CRA may also be executed. Specifically, four enemy character images may be displayed in correspondence with four transparent members, and one enemy character image may be displayed on one transparent member. As a result, each enemy character image appears to be displayed on four transparent members when viewed from the player. The background color of the four enemy characters may be changed in order by the roulette method, and the roulette wheel may be stopped by the player's operation of the effect button 63 to select one enemy character. After that, the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four translucent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 each move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move away from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), a battle start suggesting effect is executed as a continuation of the preceding stage effect. Here, a battle start suggesting image BKS labeled "Battle Start!!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(E), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the teammate character CRA is displayed alone, a meter image moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the teammate character CRA prepares to assume the posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. can give As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and during the battle effect. In addition, it moves from the first position to the second position during battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, 9), and when all are filled (when all 9 are changed in color), the friend character CRA wins the enemy character CRB. Victory or defeat is indicated by the success or failure of filling the meter to the full. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. , and a repeated hitting suggestion image RND indicated as "Continuous hitting!!!" are displayed. After that, when the meter is fully charged, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the meter image MT is switched to a full tank image MXG representing "MAX!!!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(I), a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17 . As a result, a complex effect can be performed using a plurality of smiley images, and interest can be improved. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Meter effect C]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect C. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but when it is advanced to the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), , illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111(A), in the meter effect C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a to perform the decorative design fluctuation production (variation display). During this variable effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. This meter image MT and the variable display become visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a and is displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines victory or defeat is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, it is possible to determine whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters fight a duel as in this embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses in the duel (event result) can be used to notify whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a pre-stage effect, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the advance effect of the second movable accessory 15 is executed. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates in front of the display screen 7a. This second movable accessory 15 makes at least part of the meter image MT difficult to see. Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, a battle start suggesting effect is executed. Here, a battle start suggesting image BKS labeled "Battle Start!!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a, and is partially overlapped with the start suggesting image BKS.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(E), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the teammate character CRA is displayed alone, the meter image re-moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the teammate character CRA prepares to assume the posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves leftward from the second position and stops at a predetermined position (third position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT finally becomes necessary, the meter image MT moves leftward from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby making the player nervous. can give you a feeling. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and during the battle effect. Also, it moves from the second position to the third position during the battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, 9), and when all are filled (when all 9 are changed in color), the friend character CRA wins the enemy character CRB. Victory or defeat is indicated by the success or failure of filling the meter to the full. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. , and a repeated hitting suggestion image RND indicated as "Consecutive hits!!!" are displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, the meter image MT is switched to a full tank image MXG representing "MAX!!!" as shown in FIG. 111(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(I), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. The smile image SL is randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17 . As a result, a complex effect can be performed using a plurality of smiley images, and interest can be improved. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter effect D]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect D. FIG. A meter effect D represents a subsequent effect when the battle is lost in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. Similar to the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but its illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . In addition, although the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position, its illustration is omitted. The first movable accessory 14 has four transparent members positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted.

FIG. 112(A) corresponds to FIG. 109(F), FIG. 110(F), and FIG. 111(F) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. That is, a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, 9), and when all are filled (when all 9 are changed in color), the friendly character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, so the meter is fully filled. Victory or defeat is indicated by the success or failure of Here, the meter does not become full for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112B, a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(C), the decorative symbols are stop-displayed in a lost state. At this time, the defeated ally character CRA is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the meter image MT is displayed again in a state in which the decorative symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the lost state. At this time, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), the next variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 112(F), when reach is formed in the decorative pattern, then, as shown in FIG. 112(G), a decorative pattern disappearing effect is executed in which the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, a meter image moving effect is also performed. Specifically, when the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the special ready-to-win effect finally starts, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative pattern variation effect and during the special ready-to-win effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised. The timing at which the meter image MT moves may be the same as or different from the timing at which the decorative pattern disappears from the display screen 7a. The meter image MT may move before the decorative pattern disappears, or may move after the decorative pattern disappears.

As shown in the next FIG. 112(H), a battle start suggesting effect is executed as a pre-stage effect of the battle effect. This battle start suggestion effect corresponds to FIG. 109(D), FIG. 110(D), and FIG. 111(D) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. However, the difference is that the meter image MT has already moved to the second position. Thereafter, FIG. 109(E), FIG. 110(E), and FIG. 111(E) are shown in the front stage of the battle production, and FIG. 109(F), FIG. 110(F), and FIG. is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the meter is filled up, and a victory effect is executed in which the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the meter effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109A and 109B, the first effect in which the meter image MT is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols, and after the first effect, the As shown in 109(D) to (G), while the meter image is being displayed, a second effect in which a battle effect is executed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109(D) to (G) and FIGS. 111(A) to (B), the meter image MT is at least one of the first effect and the second effect are displayed in different positions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109(A), in the first effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. , in the second effect, the meter image MT moves from the first position to the second position on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109(B) to 109(C), the meter image MT is continuously displayed during transition from the first effect to the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the battle effect includes the effect of switching the meter image MT to another image (for example, full tank image MXG). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 110, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with the first movable accessory 14, and when the first effect is shifted to the second effect, at least part of the meter image MT is displayed. A fourth effect of being covered with the transparent portion of the first movable accessory 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the meter effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The meter images MT shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 are examples, and the configuration of the meter images MT is not limited to the above. For example, the meter image MT may have a circular shape like a car meter, or may be an image that digitally displays numbers. Also, a plurality of meter images MT may be displayed. For example, it may be configured to represent the remaining energy of each of the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Also, the meter image MT may be arranged at a position other than the above-described position, and may move in a direction other than the above-described direction.

[Modification 2]
The content of each meter effect shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the meter effect A of FIG. 109, during the effects of FIGS. 109(C) and 109(I), the first movable accessory 14 may cover the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110(C). .
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 109 to 112, it has been explained that the battle production includes the production showing the event itself that decides the outcome, as well as the front stage production and the rear stage production performed before and after the production. However, the battle production represents the event itself that determines the outcome, and may be interpreted as not including the front-stage production and rear-stage production before and after the event.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a meter image used during battle production;
a first effect in which the meter image is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the battle effect is executed while the meter image is being displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the meter images are displayed at different positions in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the first effect, the meter image is displayed at a first position of the display means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in the second effect, the meter image moves from the first position to the second position on the display means.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3,
A gaming machine, wherein the meter image is continuously displayed while the first effect is shifted to the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
The game machine, wherein the battle effect includes an effect of switching the meter image to another image.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, further comprising:
Equipped with movable parts,
A gaming machine capable of executing a fourth effect in which at least part of the meter image is covered with the movable accessory when the first effect is shifted to the second effect.

The related image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. FIG. This related image display effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the related image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is an effect for displaying an image on 7a.

[Related image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect A. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but its illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, it is assumed that the effect in the game "OARO Rush" in a highly reliable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is aimed at the special 2 prize by hitting to the right.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), in the related image display effect A, after the jackpot game is over, the display screen 7a shows a high-accuracy time-saving game start suggesting image KJS indicating "OARO rush start!!" Image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 113(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and a performance related to the selected character is executed during a high-accuracy short-time game (OARO rush) starting from now. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the character is not limited to this and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, characters can be real or imaginary creatures and things, as well as characters, graphics, symbols, and scenery. Here, the plurality of character images represent different objects (persons). On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the production button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the characters currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. , a selection facilitating image SES written as "Select a character!!", and a right-handed suggesting image MGU.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images), which are selectable character candidates, are arranged in a row. Among the plurality of character images, the character image currently selected (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Also, a character image farther from the currently selected character image is displayed in a smaller size. That is, the character images on both sides of the character image being selected are displayed in the second largest size, and the character images adjacent to the character image on the outside thereof are displayed in the third largest size. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 113(B) to 113(D) show how the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. .

The magnified image KUD is an image obtained by magnifying and displaying the character image currently selected (selected) in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 113B to 113D show how the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. As for the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The button image BTN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a and partially covered with the button image BTN. In other words, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the selection promoting image SES.

When one character is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 113(E) is displayed. The adoption decision screen displays a decision notification image KHG that notifies that one character has been selected, an enlarged image KUD that displays the selected character in an enlarged manner, and a background image HKG that displays the selected character. be done. On the employment decision screen, a selection promoting image SES indicating "Select a character!!" and a right-handed hitting suggesting image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters "determine" and covers the selection prompting image SES representing "Select a character!!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that character selection has been completed. After the character is selected, the enlarged image KUD covers the selection facilitating image SES showing "Select a character!" In addition, since the selected character is superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to visually give the impression that the character is composed in a complicated manner, thereby enhancing interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, "Sunglasses Man") is displayed after the selection, the player can feel the excitement of having selected the character.

After selecting a character, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this variable effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. An icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a to indicate to the player what the selected character is. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. The background image HKG, icon image ICN, meter image MT, and variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is held, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters confront each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the selected character faces off against another character is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a pre-stage effect, an opponent determination effect for specifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 113(H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, a battle start suggesting image BKS showing "Battle Start!!!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the left side toward the center of the display screen 7a, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and the special ready-to-win effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. Victory or defeat is indicated by success or failure.

As shown in FIG. 113(I), when the meter is full, an effect is executed in which the selected character wins. After that, as shown in FIG. 113(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Related image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining related image display effect B. FIG.
A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but its illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, it is assumed that the effect in the game "Alphabet Rush" in a high-probability time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game, and that the player hits right to aim for the special 2 prize.

As shown in FIG. 114(A), in the related image display effect B, after the jackpot game is over, the display screen 7a shows a high-accuracy time-saving game start suggesting image KJS indicating "alphabet rush start!" Image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 114(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and a performance related to the selected character is executed during a high-accuracy short-time game (alphabet rush) starting from now. Here, capital letters are used as an example of characters, but the characters are not limited to this, and arbitrary objects can be adopted as characters. For example, characters can be real or imaginary creatures and things, as well as characters, graphics, symbols, and scenery. The character selection screen includes a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images (alphabet images) are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected character. An enlarged image KUD in which (alphabet) is displayed in an enlarged manner, a selection promoting image SES representing "Select an alphabet!", and a right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four alphabet images), which are candidates for selectable characters (alphabet characters), are arranged in a horizontal row. An arrow is displayed above the currently selected (selected) character image among the plurality of character images. The arrow moves according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player, and the character image being selected is switched. 114(B) to 114(D) show how the character image (alphabet) selected by the arrow is sequentially switched to the image on the right by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. It is shown.

The enlarged image KUD is an enlarged image of the currently selected character image (alphabet) in the list image ICH. The alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 114(B) to 114(D) show how the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. As for the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The button image BTN changes its color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The production button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the alphabet being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a and partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character (alphabet) is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters (alphabet) by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 114(E) is displayed. The adoption decision screen displays a decision notification image KHG for notifying that one alphabet has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected alphabet is displayed in an enlarged manner, and a background image HKG in which the selected alphabet is displayed. be. On the employment decision screen, the selection promoting image SES indicating "Choose an alphabet!" and the right-hand hitting suggesting image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters "Decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES representing "Select an alphabet!". This allows the player to easily visually determine that character (alphabet) selection has been completed. Since the magnified image KUD covers the selection facilitating image SES showing "Select an alphabet!" In addition, since the selected character (alphabet) is superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to visually give an impression of a complicated structure, thereby enhancing interest.

After selecting the character, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this variable effect, the background image HKG of the selected character (alphabet) and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. An icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a to indicate to the player what the selected character is. The background image HKG, icon image ICN, and variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines victory or defeat is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, it is possible to determine whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event for determining the outcome, there is a roulette effect in which one character is selected from a plurality of characters (alphabet characters) as in this embodiment. In this case, whether or not a particular alphabet (for example, selected alphabet) is selected in roulette (event result) can be used to notify whether or not a jackpot is won. Other examples of events that determine victory or defeat include victory or defeat in fighting or competition, success or failure in specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), and victory or defeat in playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event (roulette) itself, but also the pre-stage effect and post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 114(H), a roulette effect for selecting one of a plurality of selected alphabets is displayed as the battle effect.

In the battle effect shown in FIG. 114(H), first, as a pre-stage effect, a battle start suggesting image BKS indicated as "Roulette start!" be. The roulette represented by the roulette image RG starts rotating after being displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the roulette that is open. Whether or not the arrow hits the selected character (alphabet) indicates whether or not the player has won a big hit. As shown in FIG. 114(H), when the arrow pierces the selected character (alphabet), as shown in FIG. 114(J), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Related image display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect C. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but its illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), but illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, it is assumed that the effect in the game "OARO Rush" in a highly reliable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is aimed at the special 2 prize by hitting to the right.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), in the related image display effect A, after the jackpot game is over, the display screen 7a shows "OARO rush start!" Image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 115(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and a performance related to the selected character is executed during a high-accuracy short-time game (OARO rush) starting from now. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the character is not limited to this and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, characters can be real or imaginary creatures and things, as well as characters, figures, symbols, and scenery. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the characters currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. , a selection facilitating image SES written as "Choose a character!!", and a right-handed suggestive image MGU.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images), which are selectable character candidates, are arranged in a row. Among the plurality of character images, the character image currently selected (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, a character image farther from the currently selected character image is displayed in a smaller size. That is, the character images on both sides of the character image being selected are displayed in the second largest size, and the character images adjacent to the character image on the outside thereof are displayed in the third largest size. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 115(B) to 115(D) show how the "right" button of the select button 68 is pressed twice to sequentially switch the character image being selected to the image on the right. .

The magnified image KUD is an image obtained by magnifying and displaying the character image currently selected (selected) in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 115B to 115D show how the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. As for the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The button image BTN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a and partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 115(E) is displayed. The employment decision screen includes a decision notification image KHG that notifies that one character has been selected, an enlarged image KUD that displays the selected character in an enlarged manner, and a background image HKG that displays items related to the selected character. is displayed. Here, the background image HKG represents a portion (sunglasses) of the selected character. As long as the background image HKG is related to the selected character, it does not have to be a part or the whole of the selected character. On the employment decision screen, a selection promoting image SES indicating "Select a character!!" and a right-handed hitting suggesting image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters "determine" and covers the selection prompting image SES representing "Select a character!!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that character selection has been completed. After the character is selected, the enlarged image KUD covers the selection facilitating image SES showing "Select a character!" In addition, since the selected character is superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to visually give the impression that the character is composed in a complex manner, thereby enhancing interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, "Sunglasses Man") is displayed after the selection, it is possible to give the player an exhilarating feeling of having selected the character.

After selecting the character, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this variable effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if something related to the character is moving. An icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a to indicate to the player what the selected character is. Here the name of the selected character is shown. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. The background image HKG, icon image ICN, meter image MT, and variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines victory or defeat is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, it is possible to determine whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters confront each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the selected character faces off against another character is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as a pre-stage effect, an opponent determination effect for specifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 115(H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, a battle start suggesting image BKS showing "Battle Start!!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the left side toward the center of the display screen 7a, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and the special ready-to-win effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. Victory or defeat is indicated by success or failure.

As shown in FIG. 115(I), when the meter is not fully charged, an effect is executed in which the selected character is defeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a lost state.

[Related image display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect D. FIG. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted unless the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. FIG. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a , and the display screen 7 a is visible through the light guide plate 17 . Also, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are positioned at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize an image, which will be described later. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but when it is advanced to the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), , illustration is omitted. Here, it is assumed that the effect in the game "OARO Rush" in a highly reliable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is aimed at the special 2 prize by hitting to the right.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), in the related image display effect D, after the jackpot game is over, the display screen 7a displays "OARO rush start!" Image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 116(B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and a performance related to the selected character is executed during a high-accuracy short-time game (OARO rush) starting from now. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the character is not limited to this and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, characters can be real or imaginary creatures and things, as well as characters, graphics, symbols, and scenery. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the production button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the characters currently selected and selected are enlarged and displayed. , a selection facilitating image SES written as "Select a character!!", and a right-handed suggesting image MGU.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images), which are selectable character candidates, are arranged in a row. Among the plurality of character images, the character image currently selected (selected) is displayed so as to be positioned above the other character images. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 116(B) and 116(C) show how the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the image on the right by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. .

The magnified image KUD is an image obtained by magnifying and displaying the character image currently selected (selected) in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. 116(B) and 116(C) show how the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. As for the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The button image BTN changes its color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a and partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Then, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. During this variable effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. An icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a to indicate to the player what the selected character is. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are arranged vertically, and is used during a battle effect, which will be described later. The background image HKG, icon image ICN, meter image MT, and variable display are visible through the light guide plate 17 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is held, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative pattern in the variable display will be a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern. It is a suggestive performance. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters face each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not the game is a big win. Examples of events that determine victory or defeat include the success or failure of specific missions (climbing trees, stacking blocks, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and winning or losing playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the front-stage production and rear-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect is displayed in which the selected character faces off against another character.

In the battle effect, first, as a pre-stage effect, an opponent determination effect for specifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, a battle start suggesting image BKS showing "Battle Start!!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT moves from the left side toward the center of the display screen 7a, thereby giving the player a sense of tension. As a result, interest can be improved. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the decorative symbol variation effect and the special ready-to-win effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to feel unpredictability and be surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is fully filled. Victory or defeat is indicated by success or failure. During the battle between the selected character and the opponent, as shown in FIG. Repeated hits!!!” is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully charged, the meter image MT is switched to a full tank image MXG representing "MAX!!!" as shown in FIG. 116(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(I), a jackpot decision suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advancing movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move toward each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. The smile image SL is randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17 . As a result, a complex effect can be performed using a plurality of smiley images, and interest can be improved. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(J), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the related image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113B to 113D, a first effect in which a plurality of character images representing different objects are displayed, and after the first effect, a plurality of character images are displayed. When one character image is selected from the character images of , as shown in FIG. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), in the second effect, a background image HKG and an icon image ICN, which are related to the selected character image and have different contents from each other, are displayed. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the icon image ICN. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the background image HKG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113(B) to 113(D), in the first effect, the selection prompting image SES for prompting selection of one character image from a plurality of character images is superimposed. button image BTN is displayed, and by operating the effect button 63, the selected character image among the plurality of character images is changed to be larger than the others. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when one character image is selected from a plurality of character images by operating the effect button 63, the selection is completed by overlapping the selection promotion image SES. A decision notification image KHG suggesting that is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the related image display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
A plurality of character images shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 each showed a different face and a different alphabet. In this way, "a plurality of character images each representing different objects" is not limited to representing different types of objects such as faces, cars, and characters, and may be of the same type. The same kind of thing means, for example, even if it is the same kind of human face, if it is a different person's face, it will be a different object, and even if it is the same person's face, it will be a different object, a different expression, a different face If it is an angle, it corresponds to a different target.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the related image display effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 may be appropriately combined, or part of each contents may be omitted.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a target image representing a predetermined target;
a first effect in which a plurality of target images representing different targets are displayed;
and a second effect of displaying a related image related to the selected target image when one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images after the first effect. Characteristic game machine.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, a plurality of related images each related to the selected target image and having different contents are displayed.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
A gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of related images is an icon image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3,
A gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of related images is a background image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
In a first effect, the operation means image is displayed superimposed on a selection promotion image prompting selection of one target image from the plurality of predetermined images,
A gaming machine, wherein a target image selected from among the plurality of target images is changed by an operation of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-5,
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images by operating the operation means,
A gaming machine, wherein a selection completion image is displayed to indicate that selection has been completed, superimposed on the selection prompting image.

The battle presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. FIG. This battle production can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the battle effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This battle production is performed during one variation of the special symbols (one variation production). In addition, you may make it perform a battle production|presentation during several times of fluctuation|variation (plurality of fluctuation|variation production) of a special design.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A. FIG.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a battle start suggesting effect is executed. In this battle start suggesting effect, a battle start suggesting display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggesting effect, display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and a pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggesting effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed when the game state is the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is a effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 by moving the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect (FIG. 117(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 117(F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 117(D). This ally character determination effect indicates that the ally character CRA has been determined as the character to make a preemptive attack, and the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack against the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the friendly character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed to show that the ally character CRA has transformed and won against the enemy character CRB. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to display the jackpot pattern array, and a jackpot notification effect is executed to suggest that a jackpot will be won.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 117(F). This enemy character determination effect indicates that the character to make a preemptive attack is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack on the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, on the display screen 7a, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle victory effect described above (FIG. 117(E)) or the battle defeat effect described later can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117(G). In this battle defeat effect, an effect is produced indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, the winning pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing notification effect is executed to suggest that it is a losing game.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B. FIG.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a battle start suggesting effect is executed. In this battle start suggesting effect, a battle start suggesting display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggesting effect, display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and a pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggesting effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed when the game state is the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is a effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. A button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 . In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 by moving the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect (FIG. 118(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 118(F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 118(D). This ally character determination effect indicates that the ally character CRA has been determined as the character to make a preemptive attack, and the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack against the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the friendly character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed to show that the ally character CRA has transformed and won against the enemy character CRB. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to display the jackpot pattern array, and a jackpot notification effect is executed to suggest that a jackpot will be won.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 118(F). This enemy character determination effect indicates that the character to make a preemptive attack is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack on the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, on the display screen 7a, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle victory effect described above (FIG. 118(E)) or the battle defeat effect described later can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118(G). In this battle defeat effect, an effect is produced indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, the winning pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a losing notification effect is executed to suggest that the game is a losing game.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C. FIG.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a battle start suggesting effect is executed. In this battle start suggesting effect, a battle start suggesting display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggesting effect, display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and a pending icon 9A and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggesting effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed when the game state is the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is a effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. Also, in this first character selection effect, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL, more specifically, on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 . In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. Also, in the second character selection effect, the button image BTN is continuously displayed. In this case, the button image BTN is at the same position as in the first character selection effect, and the button image BTN has not moved. The boundary line KL moves within a certain range of the button image BTN. Note that the boundary line KL is not limited to this, and may be moved outside the range of the button image BTN. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 by moving the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect (FIG. 119(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 119(F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 119(D). This ally character determination effect indicates that the ally character CRA has been determined as the character to make a preemptive attack, and the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack against the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the friendly character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed to show that the ally character CRA has transformed and won against the enemy character CRB. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to display the jackpot pattern arrangement, and a jackpot notification effect is executed to suggest that a jackpot will be won.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 119(F). This enemy character determination effect indicates that the character to make a preemptive attack is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack on the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, on the display screen 7a, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle victory effect described above (FIG. 119(E)) or the battle defeat effect described later can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119(G). In this battle defeat effect, an effect is produced indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, the winning pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing notification effect is executed to suggest that it is a losing game.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D. FIG.
In the battle effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a battle start suggesting effect is executed. In this battle start suggesting effect, a battle start suggesting display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggesting effect, display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggesting effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed when the game state is the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is a effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. A button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 . In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Further, the meter image XF2 is displayed for the first character selection effect. The meter image XF2 is displayed on the left end of the display screen 7a and represents the meter value. The meter value of the meter image XF2 is indicated by cross hatching in the figure. The meter value of this meter image XF2 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, and the meter value can increase as the area of the first area AR1 increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 by moving the boundary line KL.

Also, in the second character selection effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases as the area of the first area AR1 increases.

After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect (FIG. 120(D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 120(F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, a teammate character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 120(D). This ally character determination effect indicates that the ally character CRA has been determined as the character to make a preemptive attack, and the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack against the enemy character CRB. In the teammate character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and the entire area becomes the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the friendly character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Also, in the teammate character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the probability of a big win rises sharply, indicating that the big win is guaranteed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed to show that the ally character CRA has transformed and won against the enemy character CRB. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to display the jackpot pattern arrangement, and a jackpot notification effect is executed to suggest that a jackpot will be won.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120(F), an enemy character determination effect can be executed. This enemy character determination effect indicates that the character to make a preemptive attack is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack on the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, on the display screen 7a, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear, and the entire area becomes the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the preemptive attack, the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

In the enemy character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 changes depending on the superiority or inferiority of the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB. does not rise when

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 120(E)) or the battle defeat effect described later can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120(G). In this battle defeat effect, an effect is produced indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, the winning pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing notification effect is executed to suggest that it is a losing game.

In this battle effect D, if the area of the first area AR1 increases, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases accordingly. may be lowered. That is, the meter value of the meter image XF2 may be made to correspond to the enlargement/reduction of the area of the first area AR1.

It should be noted that the above battle effects A to D may incorporate other effects (such as other battle effects) into one effect.
Further, in the battle effects A to D, the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect may be repeated.
In the above-described battle effects A to D, the degree of expectation for a big win changes according to the sizes of the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2. That is, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, compared to the case where the area of the first area AR1 is smaller than the area of the second area AR2 It has a highly anticipated structure. That is, based on the area of 1st area|region AR1 (2nd area|region AR2), a jackpot expectation degree is suggested.
Furthermore, in the battle effects A to D described above, depending on the type of character appearing in the first area AR1 or the second area AR2, the first area AR1 may be easily expanded or may be difficult to expand. The degree of expectation for a big win may vary depending on the type of character appearing in the area AR1 or the second area AR2.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the battle production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, and then the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed. An effect of changing the area of the area AR2 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect with movement by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the battle effects A to D described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested based on the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2). According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation for a big win changes according to the change in the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the battle effects A to D described above, the character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect with movement by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and to execute an effect with movement by the movement of the character, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be done.

[Effect 4]
In the battle effect D described above, the meter image XF2 is displayed during the effect of changing the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and to execute a moving effect by the meter value of the meter image XF2. can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the battle effect D described above, in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, the size of the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) is reflected in the meter value of the meter image XF2. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the size of the first area AR1, the degree of expectation for the big win changes depending on the meter value of the meter image XF2, so that the player can be given a feeling of excitement and enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

[Effect 6]
In the battle effect D described above, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the area of the first area AR1 becomes the first area. When the area is smaller than the area of the two areas AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is a value smaller than MAX. According to this configuration, when the area of the first area AR1 becomes larger than that of the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX and the expectation of the big win increases. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement, to give the player a great sense of excitement, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the battle production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, after the second character selection effect, the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 increase or decrease, and the first area AR1 and the size of the second area AR2 may fluctuate. Furthermore, after that, a character determination effect may be performed by making the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 about the same.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
the second display effect is a effect of changing the areas of the first display area and the second display area,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the combination effect, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested based on the area of the first display area in the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
a character is displayed in the first display area;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of performing a meter display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the size of the area of the first display area of the second display effect is reflected in the meter value of the meter display.

[Aspect XF-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is larger than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is a first value, and when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is smaller than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is set to the first value Let a second value less than
A gaming machine characterized by:

The crack effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. FIG. This cracking effect can be executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the cracking effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the screen 7a. This breaking effect is performed during one variation of the special symbols (one variation effect). In addition, you may make it perform crack production|presentation during several times of fluctuation|variation (plurality of fluctuation|variation production) of a special design.

[Cracking effect A]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the breaking effect A. FIG.
In the break effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggesting effect, a rush suggesting display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right-handed hitting suggesting display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggesting display XG1 is a probability variable state advantageous to the player, in other words, a display suggesting that the player is in a rush (during a series of games). The obtained ball display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls obtained by the player during a rush (during a series of games). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to hit right-handed. The rush suggestion display XG1, acquired ball display XG2, and right-hand hitting suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. Suspended icons 9B and 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a screen split effect is executed. In this screen split effect, a screen split display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is split is displayed. A portion of the screen split display GW reaches the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the suggestive display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the obtained ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserved icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen split display GW is displayed as if it were split (as if it were lost). (displayed as missing). On the other hand, the right-hand hitting indication XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not look like a crack (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the split screen display GW and other displays (hereinafter also referred to as non-split screen display). In the example of FIG. 121(C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed in a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 121(D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the characters “Geki Atsushi” suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.
After this border character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed.

[Cracking effect B]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the breaking effect B. FIG.
In the break effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggesting effect, a rush suggesting display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right-handed hitting suggesting display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggesting display XG1 is a probability variable state advantageous to the player, in other words, a display suggesting that the player is in a rush (during a series of games). The obtained ball display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls obtained by the player during a rush (during a series of games). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to hit right-handed. The rush suggestion display XG1, acquired ball display XG2, and right-hand hitting suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. Suspended icons 9B and 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a screen split effect is executed. In this screen split effect, a screen split display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is split is displayed. A portion of the screen split display GW reaches the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the suggestive display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the obtained ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserved icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen split display GW is displayed as if it were split (as if it were lost). . On the other hand, the right-hand hitting indication XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not look like a crack (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the split screen display GW and other displays (hereinafter also referred to as non-split screen display). In the example of FIG. 122(C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed in a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 122(D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the characters “Geki Atsushi” suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), a missing portion character appearance effect is executed. In this missing part character appearance effect, the character XG6 is displayed in the split screen display GW.
In addition, in the missing portion character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 are moving in the boundary portion between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display.
After this border character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed.

[Cracking effect C]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the breaking effect C. FIG.
In the break effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggesting effect, a rush suggesting display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right-handed hitting suggesting display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggesting display XG1 is a probability variable state advantageous to the player, in other words, a display suggesting that the player is in a rush (during a series of games). The obtained ball display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls obtained by the player during a rush (during a series of games). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to hit right-handed. The rush suggestion display XG1, acquired ball display XG2, and right-hand hitting suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. Suspended icons 9B and 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a screen split effect is executed. In this screen split effect, a screen split display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is split is displayed. A portion of the screen split display GW reaches the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the suggestive display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the obtained ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserved icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen split display GW is displayed as if it were split (as if it were lost). . On the other hand, the right-hand hitting indication XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not look like a crack (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the split screen display GW and other displays (hereinafter also referred to as non-split screen display). In the example of FIG. 123(C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed in a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 123(D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the characters “Geki Atsushi” suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a missing portion character appearance effect is executed. In this missing portion character appearance rendering, a character image XG7 is displayed in the split screen display GW. This character image XG7 represents the character "Won!?"
In addition, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 are moved in the boundary part between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display.
After this border character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed.

[Cracking effect D]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the breaking effect D. FIG.
In the break effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggesting effect, a rush suggesting display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right-handed hitting suggesting display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggesting display XG1 is a probability variable state advantageous to the player, in other words, a display suggesting that the player is in a rush (during a series of games). The obtained ball display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls obtained by the player during a rush (during a series of games). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to hit right-handed. The rush suggestion display XG1, acquired ball display XG2, and right-hand hitting suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. Suspended icons 9B and 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a screen split effect is executed. In this screen split effect, a screen split display GW showing how the screen of the display screen 7a is split is displayed. A portion of the screen split display GW reaches the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the suggestive display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the obtained ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserved icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen split display GW is displayed as if it were split (as if it were lost). . On the other hand, the right-hand hitting indication XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not look like a crack (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the split screen display GW and other displays (hereinafter also referred to as non-split screen display). In the example of FIG. 124(C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), a border character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed in a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 124(D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the characters “Geki Atsushi” suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), effect production is executed. In this effect rendering, an effect image XG8 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display. This effect image XG8 fluidly moves across the boundary. This effect image XG8 may be continuously arranged around the boundary between the split-screen display GW and the non-split-screen display, or may be partially arranged around the boundary between the split-screen display GW and the non-split-screen display. may be strategically placed.
Also, in this effect rendering, a character image XG7 is displayed within the split screen display GW. This character image XG7 represents the character "Won!?" Furthermore, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move along the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display.
After this border character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed.

Note that the break effects A to D may incorporate other effects (such as other break effects) into one effect.
In addition, in the cracking effects A to D, the screen cracking display GW can be used to make a predetermined image (for example, a chance image or a character) broken (missing) in addition to the rush suggestion display XG1 and the acquired ball display XG2. ) may be displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the crack effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the split effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after various images are displayed on the display screen 7a in the decorative symbol variation effect, the screen split effect is executed in which the screen split display GW is displayed. In this screen split effect, part of the images such as the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icons 9B, 9C are displayed as missing by the screen split display GW. According to this configuration, the defect display results in an image display with a taste different from usual, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the split screen effects A to D, part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestive display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as a missing screen display GW. . According to this configuration, the missing display of the image including the characters results in an image display with a taste different from usual, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the split screen effects A to D, the screen split effects include a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., and the characters of the non-screen split display. A portion other than the image is displayed as a defective display by the screen split display GW. According to this configuration, the lacking display of the portion other than the image including the character or the image including the character in the non-split screen display results in an image display with a different taste than usual, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the split effects A to D, a new character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character image is displayed at the boundary while the character image is displayed in a defective manner, so that various displays can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the split effects A to D, the character XG4 is newly displayed at the boundary between the split screen display GW and the non-split screen display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character is displayed in the boundary part while being displayed as a missing character, so that a variety of displays can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the split effects B to D, the character XG6 is newly displayed in the screen split display GW in the missing part character appearance effect. According to this configuration, the character XG6 is displayed in the split screen display GW, so that the character XG6 can be displayed in a variety of ways while being displayed in a defective manner, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the crack effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the break effects A to D, the boundary character appearance effect is executed after the boundary character appearance effect, but the boundary character appearance effect may be executed after the boundary character appearance effect.

[Modification 2]
In the split effects A to D, the character XG4 is displayed in front of the split screen display GW in the border character appearance effect, but is not limited to this, and is displayed behind the split screen display GW. may be displayed so as to be hidden by the split screen display GW.

[Modification 3]
In the crack effects A to D, the character image XG5 is displayed in front of the screen crack display GW in the boundary character appearance effect, but is not limited to this. A portion of the image XG5 may be displayed so as to be hidden behind the split screen display GW.

[Modification 4]
The above-mentioned cracking effects A to D were executed in a variable probability state (during rush (during continuous chan)) advantageous to the player, but not limited to this, the game state is a normal game state, a time-saving game state that is not a probability variable state may be executed. In this case, the split screen display GW loses a predetermined image.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined display area,
The second display effect is an effect that performs a loss display to display as if a part of the predetermined display area is missing,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed and the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
The predetermined display area has a character area containing characters,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a part of the character area of the predetermined display area is displayed as missing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a part of the character area of the predetermined display area and a part of the predetermined display area other than the character area are displayed as missing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, at a first boundary between the missing display area of the predetermined display area and the non-missing display area of the predetermined display area. A production that makes new characters appear is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XG-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a new character appears at a second boundary between the deficient display area and the non-defective display area of the predetermined display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect XG-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-5,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect in which a new character appears in the missing display area of the predetermined display area is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The meter button effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128. FIG. This meter button effect is a effect that can be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). It is executed at the start of the variable display of the special design, at the start of the variable production of the decorative design, during the variable production of the decorative design, during the reach production (super reach production), and the like. More specifically, in this meter button effect, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, the meter value of the meter image is increased in relation to the player's operation of the effect button, and the expectation of a big win is expected according to the degree of increase. It is a production that suggests degree.

[Meter Button Effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect A. FIG.
In the meter button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 125(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 125(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Further, during execution of this ready-to-win effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 125(D), etc., which will be described later). The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the ready-to-win decorative pattern shown in FIG. 125(B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the characters SIG of "Continuous hit!" With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . Note that in this button operation instruction presentation, the meter image EM1A is still displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts to operate (repeatedly hit) the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surroundings. This moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH leaves an afterimage like a fireball. Some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. The meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value increases as the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A by one memory. Then, the degree of increase in this meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, it suggests whether the result of the ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), a big win suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestive effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 125(D), which indicates that the meter value of the meter image EM1A has become full as a result of the player's operation of the effect button 63 . In other words, in this big win suggesting effect, it is suggested that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 125(B) will be a big win because the meter value is full. It should be noted that, in the big win suggesting effect, characters MGL of MAX indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full (indicating a big win) are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, the player can have a premonition of a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big win fixed effect indicates that the result of the ready-to-win effect (the variation) shown in FIG. 125(B) is a big win. Here, "777" is shown as the jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

On the other hand, instead of the big win suggestive effect shown in FIG. 125(E), the losing suggestive effect shown in FIG. 125(G) may be executed. In the meter effect shown in FIG. 125(D), the player's operation of the effect button 63 causes the meter value of the meter image EM1A to become full as shown in FIG. 125(G). It is done when In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 3/4. That is, in this losing indication effect, it is suggested that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 125(B) will be losing (ready-to-win losing) because the meter value is not full. It should be noted that, in the losing indication effect, characters MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating losing) are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters MLL "LOSE", it is possible to make the player feel that a big win will not occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. . In this example, "757" is shown in this losing pattern array.

[Meter Button Effect B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect B. FIG.
In the meter button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 126(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 126(A). In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It should be noted that this reach pattern array "8 ↓ 8" is a pattern array that usually becomes a big hit when the jackpot pattern array "888" is reached. The game state becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state) until the game is played 100 times, and after that, it becomes a low-probability-low base state (normal state).
Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Further, during execution of this ready-to-win effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 126(D) to be described later). The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the ready-to-win decorative pattern shown in FIG. 126(B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the characters SIG of "Continuous hit!" With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . Note that in this button operation instruction presentation, the meter image EM1A is still displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts to operate (repeatedly hit) the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surroundings. This moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH leaves an afterimage like a fireball. Some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. The meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value increases as the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A by one memory. Then, the degree of increase in this meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, it suggests whether the result of the ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. Also, the meter value (hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126(D) is displayed in blue, for example.
In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the probability variable jackpot suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variable jackpot suggesting effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 126(D), which indicates that the meter value of the meter image EM1A has become full as a result of the player's operation of the effect button 63 . That is, in this probability variable jackpot suggesting effect, it is suggested that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. Here, the color of the meter value (cross-hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126(E) changes from blue shown in FIG. high probability), for example, it is displayed by changing to red. In other words, in this probability variable jackpot suggesting effect, the color of the meter value changes from blue to red, so that the ready-to-win pattern array "8↓8" that normally becomes a big win in the ready-to-win effect shown in Fig. 126(B) is displayed. Despite the fact that it is, it suggests that the result will be a definite hit. In addition, the probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot after the jackpot game ends. That is, in this probability variable jackpot suggesting effect, the fact that the meter value is full and the color of the meter value changes from blue to red suggests that a probability variable jackpot will occur. In the probability variable jackpot suggestion effect, characters MGL of MAX indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full (suggesting a jackpot) are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, the player can have a premonition of a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the ready-to-win effect (the variation) shown in FIG. That is, in this normal jackpot pattern temporary stop effect, the normal jackpot pattern array "888" is not completely stopped, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are slightly swayed up and down (two or three frames). It is in a temporary stop state. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(G), a full rotation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this full-rotation production, the normal jackpot pattern array "888" temporarily stopped in the normal jackpot pattern temporary stop production shown in FIG. , as indicated by an arrow YA, an effect is performed in which the game is scrolled at a low speed downward so that the player can visually recognize it. Therefore, in this all-rotation effect, only the jackpot pattern array is sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the probability variable jackpot fixed effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this variable probability big win finalization performance, as a result of the full rotation performance shown in FIG. 126(G), "777" as the probability variable big winning pattern array is fixed and stopped, indicating that a big win has been achieved. That is, the temporarily stopped normal jackpot pattern is promoted to a probability variable jackpot pattern by the full rotation effect. Above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "Probability variation jackpot!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the definite variable big win by this definite variable big win confirmation performance.

[Meter Button Effect C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect C. FIG.
In the meter button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 127(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win effect shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 127(A). In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. Further, during execution of this ready-to-win effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 127(D), etc., which will be described later). The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the ready-to-win decorative pattern shown in FIG. 127(B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the characters SIG of "Continuous hit!" With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . Note that in this button operation instruction presentation, the meter image EM1A is still displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts operating (continuously hitting) the effect button 63 according to the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surroundings. This moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH leaves an afterimage like a fireball. Some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. The meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value increases as the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A by one memory. Then, the degree of increase in this meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, it suggests whether the result of the ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a losing suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the meter effect shown in FIG. 127(D), the player's operation of the effect button 63 causes the meter value of the meter image EM1A to become full as shown in FIG. 127(E). It is done when In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 3/4. That is, in this losing indication effect, it is suggested that the result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 127(B) will be losing (ready-to-win losing) because the meter value is not full. It should be noted that, in the losing indication effect, characters MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating losing) are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters MLL "LOSE", it is possible to make the player feel that a big win will not occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a losing symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This losing symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. ing. In other words, in this losing pattern temporary stop effect, the losing pattern array "757" is not completely stopped, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state in which they sway slightly (2 or 3 frames) up and down. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(G), the resurrection character production is executed on the display screen 7a. In this resurrection role object production, the second movable role object 15 ( 1) advances to the center advance position on the display screen 7a. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the center advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 includes a part of "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R and a part of "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the missing symbol array "757". It covers all of "5" invisibly. However, the "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R is partially covered in a legible manner so that the player can recognize the "7" from the uncovered portion. By this resurrection accessory presentation, the player has a premonition of resurrection from a loss to a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the resurrection accessory presentation shown in FIG. 127(G), this jackpot finalization effect temporarily stopped at the losing pattern array "757" when the second movable accessory 15 retreated from the center advance position to the home position. It shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" and have been fixed and stopped. In other words, the temporarily stopped losing pattern changes to a big hit pattern by the resurrection character production. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

[Meter Button Effect D]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect D. FIG.
In the meter button effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a time-saving (electrical support) start effect is executed when the jackpot game ends. In this time-saving start production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the characters "Time-saving start!" A right arrow YAR is displayed. It should be noted that the character "Right hit" is displayed in the display area of the right hit arrow YAR. The player is urged by the display of this right-handed arrow YAR to hit right-handedly, so that the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (electrical sapo), which makes it easier to win. can be made Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 21, the display screen 7a executes the variable performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win performance, a game ball enters the second starting port 21 in a time-saving state, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is started, and then the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It shows how it was done. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. In the decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design is displayed in the right design display area. 8R is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 128(B) shows that the decorative pattern 8CR is fluctuating (scrolling downward).
Further, during execution of this ready-to-win effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 128(D), etc., which will be described later). The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is vertically arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is switched to the ready-to-reach decoration pattern shown in FIG. 128(B), and an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. Here, in this battle presentation, the friend character CRA makes a preemptive attack on the enemy character CRB. In other words, in this battle presentation, the character who makes a preemptive attack wins the battle, that is, the preemptive attack suggests a winning character. Therefore, in this battle production, it is suggested that the ally character CRA will win the battle. Also, in the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in this meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, it suggests whether the result of the ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 2/3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a big win suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestion effect is a battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C) in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle, and as a result, the friendly character CRA wins and the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full. It is shown that That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the meter value is filled up. Then, in this big win suggestion effect, it is suggested that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 125(B) results in a big win because the meter value is full. In the center of the display screen 7a, characters "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won are displayed together with the ally character CRA. By displaying the characters "Victory!" and filling up the meter value, it is possible to make the player think that he or she will win a big win (a privilege advantageous to the player will be given).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot fixed effect indicates that the result of the ready-to-win effect (the variation) shown in FIG. 128(B) is a big win. Here, "777" is shown as the jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

On the other hand, instead of the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C), the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F) may be executed. This battle effect is switched to the ready-to-reach decoration pattern shown in FIG. 128(B), and an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. Here, in this battle presentation, the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack on the ally character CRA. In other words, in this battle presentation, the character who makes a preemptive attack wins the battle, that is, the preemptive attack suggests a winning character. Therefore, in this battle presentation, it is suggested that the enemy character CRB will win the battle. Also, in the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in this meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, it suggests whether the result of the ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased by about 1/3. That is, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F), it can be known from the degree of increase in the meter value that the enemy character CRB is superior in the battle compared to the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(G), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to an image of a battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 128(F). Is displayed. This button operation instruction effect is a effect that is performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack, like the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(F). Therefore, as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C), when the ally character CRA makes a preemptive attack, the battle effect shown in FIG. 128(C) is followed by the battle effect shown in FIG. ) is executed. Specifically, in this button operation instruction effect, characters SIG of "Continuous hit!" With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . Note that in this button operation instruction presentation, the meter image EM1A is still displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(H), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Note that this meter effect is also performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a preemptive attack. Specifically, when the player starts to operate (repeatedly hit) the effect button 63 according to the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery of the button image BOG. This moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH leaves an afterimage like a fireball. Some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. The meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value increases as the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A by one memory. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased from about 1/3 to about 2/3 shown in FIG. 128(G). In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up. When the meter effect ends, the effect similar to the effect shown in FIGS. 125(E) to 125(H) is performed thereafter, but the description is omitted here.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter button effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in relation to the operation of the effect button by the player. and the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. (For example, if the meter value rises to a full tank, it is suggested that a big win is confirmed (the higher the meter value, the easier it is for the player to receive an advantageous privilege)). According to this configuration, the player can technically intervene by skillfully operating the effect button as instructed in order to increase the meter value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in relation to the operation of the effect button by the player, and the meter image is displayed. The meter value is configured to increase when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. According to this configuration, if the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image, the meter value will increase, so the player will be happy and sad depending on whether or not the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. Become. In addition, it is possible to perform a production with a high visual effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the moving display object is generated each time the player operates the effect button. According to this configuration, the player can intervene technically by operating (rapidly hitting) the effect button more times in order to generate more moving objects and raise the meter value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, during the display of the meter image, a battle effect is performed in which the player's friend character and the enemy character fight each other. It is configured to suggest that the big win is decided by filling up the meter value of the meter image without displaying the image. According to this configuration, the player will be happy and dejected by the movement of the teammate character in the battle effect, and will watch the battle effect with great interest in whether or not the teammate character will win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the display mode (color) of the meter value changes, the result is is configured to suggest that it will be a definite variable jackpot. According to this configuration, the player watches the meter image with great interest in whether or not the display mode (color) of the meter value changes. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, in a state where the losing pattern array is displayed, when a predetermined accessory advances so as to cover a part of the losing pattern array invisibly, , the displayed losing pattern array is changed to a big winning pattern array when the accessory is retracted from the advance position, that is, when the pattern array becomes completely visible. According to this configuration, the player watches with great interest whether or not the accessory is movable while the losing pattern array is being displayed. In particular, when the losing pattern array is the ready-to-win losing pattern array, and when the role object covers a part of the ready-to-win losing pattern array invisibly, if the same patterns forming the ready-to-win are covered in a readable manner, the game can be played. It is possible to make the person have a stronger premonition that it will be a big hit. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the meter button effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing during execution of the ready-to-win effect. It may be at the same time as the establishment of, or before or after the establishment of reach. Also, at the time of ready-to-win, the decoration pattern is configured so as not to display the ready-to-win, but this may be displayed in a small size at both corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it is suggested that a jackpot will be won when the meter value is full, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, even if the meter value does not become full, or if the meter value exceeds a predetermined value, it may be suggested that a big win will occur.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the color of the meter value changes, it is suggested that a variable probability big win will occur, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the display mode such as the shape or size of the meter value changes without being limited to the color, it may be suggested that a variable probability big win will occur. Moreover, you may make it suggest not only a probability variable jackpot but also other privilege. Furthermore, an image such as characters (for example, MAX) displayed together with the meter image when the color of the meter value changes may be changed to the same color as the meter value. Furthermore, the timing at which the color of the meter value changes is arbitrary. For example, the color may be changed while the meter value is increasing, or when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button becomes equal to or less than a predetermined time. It may be changed, it may be changed when the meter value rises by a predetermined value or more, or it may be changed when the meter value becomes full.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, after temporarily stopping at the losing pattern, the character is moved so that the losing pattern changes (revives) to the big winning pattern. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be changed (revived) to a jackpot symbol by changing again (pseudo-continuation) after temporarily stopping with a losing symbol. Alternatively, after temporarily stopping with a losing pattern, when a predetermined image such as a cut-in is displayed, it may be changed (revived) to a big winning pattern.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the battle presentation, the character who attacks first wins the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a character that performs a predetermined technique may win the battle, or a character that performs consecutive techniques may win the battle. Alternatively, the character that defends the given technique and counterattacks may win the battle. In other words, the character that wins the battle may be any character that performs a predetermined mode.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, in the button operation instruction effect, the player is made to repeatedly hit the effect button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the instruction contents of the button operation may be determined in association with the type of the friendly character that appears in the battle production (for example, repeated hits if the friendly character is A, long presses if the friendly character is B, etc.). Also, the player may be allowed to perform a plurality of types of button operations. For example, in one button operation instruction presentation, multiple types of button operation instructions such as repeated hits, long presses, and single blows may be given.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F5-1]
production means capable of executing a plurality of productions;
display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
a production button operable by the player;
A gaming machine comprising
one of the plurality of representations is a first representation;
The first display is a display of a meter image,
one of the plurality of representations is a second representation;
the second display is a display of a button image;
One of the plurality of productions is a first production,
In the first effect, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, the meter value of the meter image is increased in association with the player's operation of the effect button, and the degree of increase of the meter value. By suggesting the degree of jackpot expectation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F5-2]
In the first effect, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in relation to the player's operation of the effect button, and the meter value of the meter image is the moving display object. rises by reaching the display area of the meter image,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1, characterized by:
[Aspect F5-3]
The moving display object is generated each time the player operates the production button,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-2, characterized by:
[Aspect F5-4]
When the meter value of the previous meter image is full, it suggests a jackpot decision,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-3, characterized by:
[Aspect F5-5]
One of the plurality of productions is a second production,
In the second effect, a battle effect is performed in which a player's ally character and an enemy character fight against each other while the meter image is being displayed, and when the ally character wins, the button image is displayed. Suggests that the jackpot is confirmed by filling the meter value of the previous meter image without
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-4, characterized by:
[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 18 Third movable accessory 20 First starting port (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area , and the display means located inside the first display area. A first character is displayed at a first position of the display means, and a second character is displayed at a second position of the display means located inside the second display area,
The second display effect is an operation means image representing the operation means on the boundary between the first display area and the second display area, and prompts the player to operate the operation means. means to display the image,
In the third display effect, the operation means is not operated, the first character is continuously displayed without moving from the first position, and the second character is displayed as an effect in which the position where the boundary and the operation means image overlap and are displayed changes in a state where the image is displayed continuously without moving from the second position ;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images